summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/37589.txt
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to '37589.txt')
-rw-r--r--37589.txt7333
1 files changed, 7333 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/37589.txt b/37589.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b3046d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37589.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7333 @@
+The Project Gutenberg eBook, Through Magic Glasses and Other Lectures, by
+Arabella B. Buckley
+
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+
+
+
+Title: Through Magic Glasses and Other Lectures
+ A Sequel to The Fairyland of Science
+
+
+Author: Arabella B. Buckley
+
+
+
+Release Date: October 1, 2011 [eBook #37589]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII)
+
+
+***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THROUGH MAGIC GLASSES AND OTHER
+LECTURES***
+
+
+E-text prepared by Chris Curnow, Robin Shaw, and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team (http://www.pgdp.net) from page images generously made
+available by Internet Archive (http://www.archive.org)
+
+
+
+Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this
+ file which includes the original illustrations.
+ See 37589-h.htm or 37589-h.zip:
+ (http://www.gutenberg.org/files/37589/37589-h/37589-h.htm)
+ or
+ (http://www.gutenberg.org/files/37589/37589-h.zip)
+
+
+ Images of the original pages are available through
+ Internet Archive. See
+ http://www.archive.org/details/throughmagicglas00buck
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: For Description see Page 152 Frontispiece
+
+THE GREAT NEBULA OF ORION
+
+From a photograph taken on February 4th, 1889 by Mr Isaac Roberts.]
+
+
+THROUGH MAGIC GLASSES AND OTHER LECTURES
+
+A Sequel to The Fairyland of Science
+
+by
+
+ARABELLA B. BUCKLEY
+(Mrs. Fisher)
+
+Author of Life and Her Children, Winners in Life's Race,
+A Short History of Natural Science, Etc.
+
+With Numerous Illustrations
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+New York
+D. Appleton and Company
+1890
+
+Authorized Edition.
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE.
+
+
+The present volume is chiefly intended for those of my young friends who
+have read, and been interested in, the _Fairyland of Science_. It
+travels over a wide field, pointing out a few of the marvellous facts
+which can be studied and enjoyed by the help of optical instruments. It
+will be seen at a glance that any one of the subjects dealt with might
+be made the study of a lifetime, and that the little information given
+in each lecture is only enough to make the reader long for more.
+
+In these days, when moderate-priced instruments and good books and
+lectures are so easily accessible, I hope some eager minds may be thus
+led to take up one of the branches of science opened out to us by magic
+glasses; while those who go no further will at least understand
+something of the hitherto unseen world which is now being studied by
+their help.
+
+The two last lectures wander away from this path, and yet form a natural
+conclusion to the Magician's lectures to his young Devonshire lads. They
+have been published before, one in the _Youth's Companion_ of Boston,
+U.S., and the other in _Atalanta_, in which the essay on Fungi also
+appeared in a shorter form. All three lectures have, however, been
+revised and fully illustrated, and I trust that the volume, as a whole,
+may prove a pleasant Christmas companion.
+
+For the magnificent photograph of Orion's nebula, forming the
+Frontispiece, I am indebted to the courtesy of Mr. Isaac Roberts,
+F.R.A.S., who most kindly lent me the plate for reproduction; and I have
+had the great good fortune to obtain permission from MM. Henri of the
+Paris Observatory to copy the illustration of the Lunar Apennines from a
+most beautiful and perfect photograph of part of the moon, taken by them
+only last March. My cordial thanks are also due to Mr. A. Cottam,
+F.R.A.S., for preparing the plate of coloured double stars, and to my
+friend Mr. Knobel, Hon. Sec. of the R.A.S., for much valuable
+assistance; to Mr. James Geikie for the loan of some illustrations from
+his _Geology_; and to Messrs. Longman for permission to copy Herschel's
+fine drawing of Copernicus.
+
+With the exception of these illustrations and a few others, three of
+which were kindly given me by Messrs. Macmillan, all the woodcuts have
+been drawn and executed under the superintendence of Mr. Carreras, jun.,
+who has made my task easier by the skill and patience he has exercised
+under the difficulties incidental to receiving instructions from a
+distance.
+
+ ARABELLA B. BUCKLEY.
+
+UPCOTT AVENEL, _Oct. 1890_.
+
+
+
+
+TABLE OF CONTENTS
+
+
+ CHAPTER I PAGE
+ THE MAGICIAN'S CHAMBER BY MOONLIGHT 1
+
+ CHAPTER II
+ MAGIC GLASSES AND HOW TO USE THEM 27
+
+ CHAPTER III
+ FAIRY RINGS AND HOW THEY ARE MADE 55
+
+ CHAPTER IV
+ THE LIFE-HISTORY OF LICHENS AND MOSSES 75
+
+ CHAPTER V
+ THE HISTORY OF A LAVA STREAM 96
+
+ CHAPTER VI
+ AN HOUR WITH THE SUN 117
+
+ CHAPTER VII
+ AN EVENING AMONG THE STARS 145
+
+ CHAPTER VIII
+ LITTLE BEINGS FROM A MINIATURE OCEAN 172
+
+ CHAPTER IX
+ THE DARTMOOR PONIES 195
+
+ CHAPTER X
+ THE MAGICIAN'S DREAM OF ANCIENT DAYS 209
+
+
+
+
+LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
+
+
+ PLATES
+
+ PHOTOGRAPH OF THE NEBULA OF ORION _Frontispiece_
+
+ TABLE OF COLOURED SPECTRA Plate I. _facing p._ 127
+
+ COLOURED DOUBLE STARS Plate II. _facing p._ 167
+
+
+ WOODCUTS IN THE TEXT PAGE
+
+ PARTIAL ECLIPSE OF THE MOON _Initial letter_ 1
+
+ A BOY ILLUSTRATING THE PHASES OF THE MOON 6
+
+ COURSE OF THE MOON IN THE HEAVENS 8
+
+ CHART OF THE MOON 10
+
+ FACE OF THE FULL MOON 11
+
+ TYCHO AND HIS SURROUNDINGS (from a photograph by De la Rue) 13
+
+ PLAN OF THE PEAK OF TENERIFFE 15
+
+ THE CRATER COPERNICUS 17
+
+ THE LUNAR APPENNINES (from a photograph by M.M. Henri) 19
+
+ THE CRATER PLATO SEEN SOON AFTER SUNRISE 20
+
+ DIAGRAM OF TOTAL ECLIPSE OF THE MOON 23
+
+ BOY AND MICROSCOPE _Initial letter_ 27
+
+ EYE-BALL SEEN FROM THE FRONT 30
+
+ SECTION OF AN EYE LOOKING AT A PENCIL 31
+
+ IMAGE OF A CANDLE-FLAME THROWN ON PAPER BY A LENS 33
+
+ ARROW MAGNIFIED BY A CONVEX LENS 35
+
+ STUDENT'S MICROSCOPE 36
+
+ SKELETON OF A MICROSCOPE 37
+
+ FOSSIL DIATOMS SEEN UNDER THE MICROSCOPE 39
+
+ AN ASTRONOMICAL TELESCOPE 41
+
+ TWO SKELETONS OF TELESCOPES 44
+
+ THE PHOTOGRAPHIC CAMERA 47
+
+ KIRCHHOFF'S SPECTROSCOPE 51
+
+ PASSAGE OF RAYS THROUGH THE SPECTROSCOPE 52
+
+ A GROUP OF FAIRY-RING MUSHROOMS _Initial letter_ 55
+
+ THREE FORMS OF VEGETABLE MOULD MAGNIFIED 61
+
+ _MUCOR MUCEDO_ GREATLY MAGNIFIED 63
+
+ YEAST CELLS GROWING UNDER THE MICROSCOPE 65
+
+ EARLY STAGES OF THE MUSHROOM 67
+
+ LATER STAGES OF THE MUSHROOM 68
+
+ MICROSCOPIC STRUCTURE OF MUSHROOM GILLS 69
+
+ A GROUP OF CUP LICHENS _Initial letter_ 75
+
+ EXAMPLES OF LICHENS FROM LIFE 77
+
+ SINGE-CELLED PLANTS GROWING 78
+
+ SECTIONS OF LICHENS 81
+
+ FRUCTIFICATION OF A LICHEN 83
+
+ A STEM OF FEATHERY MOSS FROM LIFE 85
+
+ MOSS-LEAF MAGNIFIED 87
+
+ _POLYTRICHUM COMMUNE_, A LARGE HAIR-MOSS 88
+
+ FRUCTIFICATION OF A MOSS 89
+
+ SPHAGNUM MOSS FROM A DEVONSHIRE BOG 93
+
+ SURFACE OF A LAVA-FLOW _Initial letter_ 96
+
+ VESUVIUS AS SEEN IN ERUPTION 97
+
+ TOP OF VESUVIUS IN 1864 100
+
+ DIAGRAMMATIC SECTION OF AN ACTIVE VOLCANO 105
+
+ SECTION OF A LAVA-FLOW 108
+
+ VOLCANIC GLASS WITH CRYSTALLITES AND MICROLITHS 109
+
+ VOLCANIC GLASS WITH WELL-DEVELOPED MICROLITHS 110
+
+ A PIECE OF DARTMOOR GRANITE 112
+
+ VOLCANIC GLASS SHOWING LARGE INCLUDED CRYSTALS 115
+
+ A TOTAL ECLIPSE OF THE SUN _Initial letter_ 117
+
+ FACE OF THE SUN PROJECTED ON A PIECE OF CARDBOARD 120
+
+ PHOTOGRAPH OF THE SUN'S FACE, taken by Mr. Selwyn
+ (Secchi, _Le Soleil_) 122
+
+ TOTAL ECLIPSE OF THE SUN, SHOWING CORONA AND PROMINENCES
+ (Guillemin, _Le Ciel_) 124
+
+ KIRCHHOFF'S EXPERIMENT ON THE DARK SODIUM LINE 128
+
+ THE SPECTROSCOPE ATTACHED TO THE TELESCOPE FOR SOLAR WORK 132
+
+ SUN-SPECTRUM AND PROMINENCE SPECTRUM COMPARED 134
+
+ RED PROMINENCES, as drawn by Mr. Lockyer 1869 136
+
+ A QUIET SUN-SPOT 140
+
+ A TUMULTUOUS SUN-SPOT 141
+
+ A STAR-CLUSTER _Initial letter_ 145
+
+ SOME CONSTELLATIONS SEEN ON LOOKING SOUTH IN MARCH FROM
+ SIX TO NINE O'CLOCK 148
+
+ THE CHIEF STARS OF ORION, WITH ALDEBARAN 149
+
+ THE TRAPEZIUM [Greek: th] ORIONIS 150
+
+ SPECTRUM OF ORION'S NEBULA AND SUN-SPECTRUM COMPARED 151
+
+ SOME CONSTELLATIONS SEEN ON LOOKING NORTH IN MARCH FROM
+ SIX TO NINE O'CLOCK 156
+
+ THE GREAT BEAR, SHOWING POSITION OF THE BINARY STAR 157
+
+ DRIFTING OF THE SEVEN STARS OF CHARLES'S WAIN 159
+
+ CASSIOPEIA AND THE HEAVENLY BODIES NEAR 162
+
+ [Greek: e] LYRAE, A DOUBLE-BINARY STAR 166
+
+ A SEASIDE POOL _Initial letter_ 172
+
+ A GROUP OF SEAWEEDS (natural size) 175
+
+ _ULVA LACTUCA_, a piece greatly magnified 176
+
+ SEAWEEDS, magnified to show fruits 177
+
+ A CORALLINE AND SERTULARIAN COMPARED 179
+
+ _SERTULARIA TENELLA_ HANGING IN WATER 180
+
+ _THURICOLLA FOLLICULATA_ AND _CHILOMONAS AMYGDALUM_ 182
+
+ A GROUP OF LIVING DIATOMS 184
+
+ A DIATOM GROWING 185
+
+ _CYDIPPE PILEUS_, ANIMAL AND STRUCTURE 187
+
+ THE SEA-MAT, _FLUSTRA FOLIACEA_ 191
+
+ DIAGRAM OF THE FLUSTRA ANIMAL 192
+
+ DARTMOOR PONIES _Initial letter_ 195
+
+ _EQUUS HEMIONUS_, THE HORSE-ASS OF TARTARY AND TIBET 201
+
+ PRZEVALSKY'S WILD HORSE 202
+
+ SKELETON OF AN ANIMAL OF THE HORSE-TRIBE 206
+
+ PALAEOLITHIC MAN CHIPPING FLINT TOOLS _Initial letter_ 209
+
+ SCENE IN PALAEOLITHIC TIMES 212
+
+ PALAEOLITHIC RELICS--NEEDLE, TOOTH, IMPLEMENT 213
+
+ MAMMOTH ENGRAVED ON IVORY 216
+
+ NEOLITHIC IMPLEMENTS--HATCHET, CELT, SPINDLE WHORL 219
+
+ A BURIAL IN NEOLITHIC TIMES 221
+
+ BRITISH RELICS--COIN, BRONZE CELT, AND BRACELET 223
+
+ BRITONS TAKING REFUGE IN THE CAVE 224
+
+
+
+
+THROUGH MAGIC GLASSES
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+THE MAGICIAN'S CHAMBER BY MOONLIGHT
+
+
+[Illustration]
+
+The full moon was shining in all its splendour one lovely August night,
+as the magician sat in his turret chamber bathed in her pure white
+beams, which streamed upon him through the open shutter in the wooden
+dome above. It is true a faint gleam of warmer light shone from below
+through the open door, for this room was but an offshoot at the top of
+the building, and on looking down the turret stairs a lecture-room might
+be seen below where a bright light was burning. Very little, however, of
+this warm glow reached the magician, and the implements of his art
+around him looked like weird gaunt skeletons as they cast their long
+shadows across the floor in the moonlight.
+
+The small observatory, for such it was, was a circular building with
+four windows in the walls, and roofed with a wooden dome, so made that
+it could be shifted round and round by pulling certain cords. One
+section of this dome was a shutter, which now stood open, and the strip,
+thus laid bare to the night, was so turned as to face that part of the
+sky along which the moon was moving. In the centre of the room, with its
+long tube directed towards the opening, stood the largest magic glass,
+the TELESCOPE, and in the dead stillness of the night, could be heard
+distinctly the tick-tick of the clockwork, which kept the instrument
+pointing to the face of the moon, while the room, and all in it, was
+being carried slowly and steadily onwards by the earth's rotation on its
+axis. It was only a moderate-sized instrument, about six feet long,
+mounted on a solid iron pillar firmly fixed to the floor and fitted with
+the clockwork, the sound of which we have mentioned; yet it looked like
+a giant as the pale moonlight threw its huge shadow on the wall behind
+and the roof above.
+
+Far away from this instrument in one of the windows, all of which were
+now closed with shutters, another instrument was dimly visible. This was
+a round iron table, with clawed feet, and upon it, fastened by screws,
+were three tubes, so arranged that they all pointed towards the centre
+of the table, where six glass prisms were arranged in a semicircle, each
+one fixed on a small brass tripod. A strange uncanny-looking instrument
+this, especially as the prisms caught the edge of the glow streaming up
+the turret stair, and shot forth faint beams of coloured light on the
+table below them. Yet the magician's pupils thought it still more
+uncanny and mysterious when their master used it to read the alphabet of
+light, and to discover by vivid lines even the faintest trace of a metal
+otherwise invisible to mortal eye.
+
+For this instrument was the SPECTROSCOPE, by which he could break up
+rays of light and make them tell him from what substances they came.
+Lying around it were other curious prisms mounted in metal rims and
+fitted with tubes and many strange devices, not to be understood by the
+uninitiated, but magical in their effect when fixed on to the telescope
+and used to break up the light of distant stars and nebulae.
+
+Compared with these mysterious glasses the PHOTOGRAPHIC CAMERA, standing
+in the background, with its tall black covering cloth, like a hooded
+monk, looked comparatively natural and familiar, yet it, too, had
+puzzling plates and apparatus on the table near it, which could be
+fitted on to the telescope, so that by their means pictures might be
+taken even in the dark night, and stars, invisible with the strongest
+lens, might be forced to write their own story, and leave their image on
+the plate for after study.
+
+All these instruments told of the magician's power in unveiling the
+secrets of distant space and exploring realms unknown, but in another
+window, now almost hidden in the shadow, stood a fourth and
+highly-prized helpmate, which belonged in one sense more to our earth,
+since everything examined by it had to be brought near, and lie close
+under its magnifying-glass. Yet the MICROSCOPE too could carry its
+master into an unseen world, hidden to mortal eye by minuteness instead
+of by distance. If in the stillness of night the telescope was his most
+cherished servant and familiar friend, the microscope by day opened out
+to him the fairyland of nature.
+
+As he sat on his high pedestal stool on this summer night with the
+moonlight full upon him, his whole attention was centred on the
+telescope, and his mind was far away from that turret-room, wandering
+into the distant space brought so near to him; for he was waiting to
+watch an event which brought some new interest every time it took
+place--a total eclipse of the moon. To-night he looked forward to it
+eagerly, for it happened that, just as the moon would pass into the
+shadow of our earth, it would also cross directly in front of a star,
+causing what is known as an "occultation" of the star, which would
+disappear suddenly behind the rim of the dark moon, and after a short
+time flash out on the other side as the satellite went on its way.
+
+How he wished as he sat there that he could have shown this sight to all
+the eager lads whom he was teaching to handle and love his magic
+glasses. For this magician was not only a student himself, he was a rich
+man and the Founder and Principal of a large public school for boys of
+the artisan class. He had erected a well-planned and handsome building
+in the midst of the open country, and received there, on terms within
+the means of their parents, working-lads from all parts of England, who,
+besides the usual book-learning, received a good technical education in
+all its branches. And, while he left to other masters the regular
+school lessons, he kept for himself the intense pleasure of opening the
+minds of these lads to the wonders of God's universe around them.
+
+You had only to pass down the turret stairs, into the large science
+class-room below, to see at once that a loving hand and heart had
+furnished it. Not only was there every implement necessary for
+scientific work, but numerous rough diagrams covering the walls showed
+that labour as well as money had been spent in decorating them. It was a
+large oblong room, with four windows to the north, and four to the
+south, in each of which stood a microscope with all the tubes, needles,
+forceps, knives, etc., necessary for dissecting and preparing objects;
+and between the windows were open shelves, on which were ranged
+chemicals of various kinds, besides many strange-looking objects in
+bottles, which would have amused a trained naturalist, for the lads
+collected and preserved whatever took their fancy.
+
+On some of the tables were photographic plates laid ready for printing
+off; on others might be seen drawings of the spectrum, made from the
+small spectroscope fixed at one end of the room; on others lay small
+direct spectroscopes which the lads could use for themselves. But
+nowhere was a telescope to be seen. This was not because there were
+none, for each table had its small hand-telescope, cheap but good. The
+truth is that each of these instruments had been spirited away into the
+dormitories that night, and many heads were lying awake on their
+pillows, listening for the strike of the clock to spring out and see
+the eclipse begin.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 1.
+
+A boy illustrating the phases of the moon.]
+
+A mere glance round the room showed that the moon had been much studied
+lately. On the black-board was drawn a rough diagram, showing how a boy
+can illustrate for himself the moon's journey round the earth, by taking
+a ball and holding it a little above his head at arm's length, while he
+turns slowly round on his heel in a darkened room before a lighted lamp,
+or better still before the lens of a magic lantern (Fig. 1). The lamp or
+lens then represents the sun, the ball is the moon, the boy's head is
+the earth. Beginning with the ball between him and the source of light,
+but either a little above, or a little below the direct line between his
+eye and it, he will see only the dark side of the ball, and the moon
+will be on the point of being "new." Then as he turns slowly, a thin
+crescent of light will creep over the side nearest the sun, and by
+degrees encroach more and more, so that when he has turned through one
+quarter of the round half the disc will be light. When he has turned
+another quarter, and has his back to the sun, a full moon will face him.
+Then as he turns on through the third quarter a crescent of darkness
+creeps slowly over the side away from the sun, and gradually the bright
+disc is eaten away by shadow till at the end of the third quarter half
+the disc again only is light; then, when he has turned through another
+quarter and completed the circle, he faces the light again and has a
+dark moon before him. But he must take care to keep the moon a little
+above or a little below his eye at new and full moon. If he brings it
+exactly on a line with himself and the light at new moon, he will shut
+off the light from himself and see the dark body of the ball against the
+light, causing an _eclipse_ of the sun; while if he does the same at
+full moon his head will cast a shadow on the ball causing an _eclipse_
+of the moon.
+
+There were other diagrams showing how and why such eclipses do really
+happen at different times in the moon's path round the earth; but
+perhaps the most interesting of all was one he had made to explain what
+so few people understand, namely, that though the moon describes a
+complete circle round our earth every month, yet she does not describe a
+circle in space, but a wavy line inwards and outwards across the
+earth's path round the sun. This is because the earth is moving on all
+the while, carrying the moon with it, and it is only by seeing it drawn
+before our eyes that we can realise how it happens.
+
+Thus suppose, in order to make the dates as simple as possible, that
+there is a new moon on the 1st of some month. Then by the 9th (or
+roughly speaking in 7-3/4 days) the moon will have described a quarter
+of a circle round the earth as shown by the dotted line (Fig. 2), which
+marks her position night after night with regard to us. Yet because she
+is carried onwards all the while by the earth, she will really have
+passed along the interrupted line - - - - between us and the sun. During
+the next week her quarter of a circle will carry her round behind the
+earth, so that we see her on the 17th as a full moon, yet her actual
+movement has been onwards along the interrupted line on the farther side
+of the earth. During the third week she creeps round another quarter of
+a circle so as to be in advance of the earth on its yearly journey round
+the sun, and reaches the end of her third quarter on the 24th. In her
+last quarter she gradually passes again between the earth and the sun;
+and though, as regards the earth, she appears to be going back round to
+the same place where she was at the beginning of the month, and on the
+31st is again a dark new moon, yet she has travelled onwards exactly as
+much as we have, and therefore has really not described a circle in the
+_heavens_ but a wavy line.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 2.
+
+Diagram showing the moon's course during one month. The moon and the
+earth are both moving onwards in the direction of the arrows. The earth
+moves along the dark line, the moon along the interrupted line - - - -.
+The dotted curved line .... shows the circle gradually described by the
+moon round the earth as they move onwards.]
+
+Near to this last diagram hung another, well loved by the lads, for it
+was a large map of the _face_ of the moon, that is of the side which is
+_always_ turned towards us, because the moon turns once on her axis
+during the month that she is travelling round the earth. On this map
+were marked all the different craters, mountains, plains and shining
+streaks which appear on the moon's face; while round the chart were
+pictures of some of these at sunrise and sunset on the moon, or during
+the long day of nearly a fortnight which each part of the face enjoys in
+its turn.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 3.
+
+Chart of the moon.
+
+Craters--
+
+ 1 Tycho. 4 Aristarchus. 7 Plato. 10 Petavius.
+ 2 Copernicus. 5 Eratosthenes. 8 Eudoxus. 11 Ptolemy.
+ 3 Kepler. 6 Archimedes. 9 Aristotle.
+
+Grey plains formerly believed to be seas--
+
+ A Mare Crisium. O Mare Imbrium.
+ C ---- Frigoris. Q Oceanus Procellarum.
+ G ---- Tranquillitatis. X Mare Foecunditatis.
+ H ---- Serenitatis. T ---- Humorum.]
+
+By studying this map, and the pictures, they were able, even in their
+small telescopes, to recognise Tycho and Copernicus, and the mountains
+of the moon, after they had once grown accustomed to the strange
+changes in their appearance which take place as daylight or darkness
+creeps over them. They could not however pick out more than some of the
+chief points. Only the magician himself knew every crater and ridge
+under all its varying lights, and now, as he waited for the eclipse to
+begin, he turned to a lad who stood behind him, almost hidden in the
+dark shadow--the one fortunate boy who had earned the right to share
+this night's work.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 3_a_.
+
+The full moon. (From Ball's _Starland_.)]
+
+"We have still half an hour, Alwyn," said he, "before the eclipse will
+begin, and I can show you the moon's face well to-night. Take my place
+here and look at her while I point out the chief features. See first,
+there are the grey plains (A, C, G, etc.) lying chiefly in the lower
+half of the moon. You can often see these on a clear night with the
+naked eye, but you must remember that then they appear more in the upper
+part, because in the telescope we see the moon's face inverted or upside
+down.
+
+"These plains were once thought to be oceans, but are now proved to be
+dry flat regions situated at different levels on the moon, and much like
+what deserts and prairies would appear on our earth if seen from the
+same distance. Looking through the telescope, is it not difficult to
+imagine how people could ever have pictured them as a man's face? But
+not so difficult to understand how some ancient nations thought the moon
+was a kind of mirror, in which our earth was reflected as in a
+looking-glass, with its seas and rivers, mountains and valleys; for it
+does look something like a distant earth, and as the light upon it is
+really reflected from the sun it was very natural to compare it to a
+looking-glass.
+
+"Next cast your eye over the hundreds of craters, some large, others
+quite small, which cover the moon's face with pitted marks, like a man
+with small-pox; while a few of the larger rings look like holes made in
+a window-pane, where a stone has passed through, for brilliant shining
+streaks radiate from them on all sides like the rays of a star, covering
+a large part of the moon. Brightest of all these starred craters is
+Tycho, which you will easily find near the top of the moon (I, Fig. 3),
+for you have often seen it in the small telescope. How grand it looks
+to-night in the full moon (Fig. 3_a_)! It is true you see all the
+craters better when the moon is in her quarters, because the light falls
+sideways upon them and the shadows are more sharply defined; yet even at
+the full the bright ray of light on Tycho's rim marks out the huge
+cavity, and you can even see faintly the magnificent terraces which run
+round the cup within, one below the other."
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 4.
+
+Tycho and his surroundings. (From a photograph of the moon taken by Mr.
+De la Rue, 1863.)]
+
+"This cavity measures fifty-four miles across, so that if it could be
+moved down to our earth it would cover by far the largest part of
+Devonshire, or that portion from Bideford on the north, to the sea on
+the south, and from the borders of Cornwall on the east, to Exeter on
+the west, and it is 17,000 feet or nearly three miles in depth. Even in
+the brilliant light of the full moon this enormous cup is dark compared
+to the bright rim, but it is much better seen in about the middle of the
+second quarter, when the rising sun begins to light up one side while
+the other is in black night. The drawing on the wall (Fig. 4), which is
+taken from an actual photograph of the moon's face, shows Tycho at this
+time surrounded by the numerous other craters which cover this part of
+the moon. You may recognise him by the gleaming peak in the centre of
+the cup, and by his bright rim which is so much more perfect than those
+of his companions. The gleaming peak is the top of a steep cone or hill
+rising up 6000 feet, or more than a mile from the base of the crater, so
+that even the summit is about two miles below the rim.
+
+"There is one very interesting point in Tycho, however, which is seen at
+its very best at full moon. Look outside the bright rim and you will see
+that from the shadow which surrounds it there spring on all sides those
+strange brilliant streaks (see Fig. 3_a_) which I spoke of just now.
+There are others quite as bright, or even brighter, round other craters,
+Copernicus (Fig. 6), Kepler, and Aristarchus, lower down on the
+right-hand side of the moon; but these of Tycho are far the most widely
+spread, covering almost all the top of the face.
+
+"What are these streaks? We do not know. During the second quarter of
+the moon, when the sun is rising slowly upon Tycho, lighting up his
+peak and showing the crater beautifully divided into a bright cup in the
+curve to the right, while a dense shadow lies in the left hollow, these
+streaks are only faint, and among the many craters around (see Fig. 4)
+you might even have some difficulty at first in finding the well-known
+giant. But as the sun rises higher and higher they begin to appear, and
+go on increasing in brightness till they shine with that wonderfully
+silvery light you see now in the full moon."
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 5.
+
+Plan of the Peak of Teneriffe, showing how it resembles a lunar crater.
+(A. Geikie.)]
+
+"Here is a problem for you young astronomers to solve, as we learn more
+and more how to use the telescope with all its new appliances."
+
+The crater itself is not so difficult to explain, for we have many like
+it on our earth, only not nearly so large. In fact, we might almost say
+that our earthly volcanoes differ from those in the moon only by their
+smaller size and by forming _mountains_ with the crater or cup on the
+top; while the lunar craters lie flat on the surface of the moon, the
+hollow of the cup forming a depression below it. The peak of Teneriffe
+(Fig. 5), which is a dormant volcano, is a good copy in miniature on our
+earth of many craters on the moon. The large plain surrounded by a high
+rocky wall, broken in places by lava streams, the smaller craters
+nestling in the cup, and the high peak or central crater rising up far
+above the others, are so like what we see on the moon that we cannot
+doubt that the same causes have been at work in both cases, even though
+the space enclosed in the rocky wall of Teneriffe measures only eight
+miles across, while that of Tycho measures fifty-four.
+
+"But of the streaks we have no satisfactory explanation. They pass alike
+over plain and valley and mountain, cutting even across other craters
+without swerving from their course. The astronomer Nasmyth thought they
+were the remains of cracks made when the volcanoes were active, and
+filled with molten lava from below, as water oozes up through ice-cracks
+on a pond. But this explanation is not quite satisfactory, for the lava,
+forcing its way through, would cool in ridges which ought to cast a
+shadow in sunlight. These streaks, however, not only cast no shadow, as
+you can see at the full moon but when the sun shines sideways upon them
+in the new or waning moon they disappear as we have seen altogether.
+Thus the streaks, so brilliant at full moon in Tycho, Copernicus,
+Kepler, and Aristarchus, remain a puzzle to astronomers still."
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 6.
+
+The crater Copernicus. (As given in Herschel's _Astronomy_, from a
+drawing taken in a reflecting telescope of 20 feet focal length.)]
+
+"We cannot examine these three last-named craters well to-night with the
+full sun upon them; but mark their positions well, for Copernicus, at
+least, you must examine on the first opportunity, when the sun is
+rising upon it in the moon's second quarter. It is larger even than
+Tycho, measuring fifty-six miles across, and has a hill in the centre
+with many peaks; while outside, great spurs or ridges stretch in all
+directions sometimes for more than a hundred miles, and between these
+are scattered innumerable minute craters. But the most striking feature
+in it is the ring, which is composed inside the crater of magnificent
+terraces divided by deep ravines. These terraces are in some ways very
+like those of the great crater of Teneriffe, and astronomers can best
+account for them by supposing that this immense crater was once filled
+with a lake of molten lava rising, cooling at the edges, and then
+falling again, leaving the solid ridge behind. The streaks are also
+beautifully shown in Copernicus (see Fig. 6), but, as in Tycho, they
+fade away as the sun sets on the crater, and only reappear gradually as
+midday approaches.
+
+"And now, looking a little to the left of Copernicus, you will see that
+grand range of mountains, the Lunar Apennines (Fig. 7), which stretches
+400 miles across the face of the moon. Other mountain ranges we could
+find, but none so like mountains on our own globe as these, with their
+gentle sunny slope down to a plain on the left, and steep perpendicular
+cliffs on the right. The highest peak in this range, called Huyghens,
+rises to the height of 21,000 feet, higher than Chimborazo in the Andes.
+Other mountains on the moon, such as those called the Caucasus, south of
+the Apennines, are composed of disconnected peaks, while others again
+stand as solitary pyramids upon the plains."
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 7.
+
+The Lunar Apennines.
+
+(Copied by kind permission of MM. Henri from part of a magnificent
+photograph taken by them, March 29, 1890, at the Paris Observatory.)]
+
+"But we must hasten on, for I want you to observe those huge walled
+crater-plains which have no hill in the middle, but smooth steel-grey
+centres shining like mirrors in the moonlight. One of these, called
+Archimedes, you will find just below the Lunar Apennines (Figs. 3 and
+7), and another called Plato, which is sixty miles broad, is still lower
+down the moon's face (Figs. 3 and 8). The centres of these broad
+circles are curiously smooth and shining like quicksilver, with minute
+dots here and there which are miniature craters, while the walls are
+rugged and crowned with turret-shaped peaks."
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 8.
+
+The crater Plato as seen soon after sunrise. (After Neison.)]
+
+"It is easy to picture to oneself how these may once have been vast seas
+of lava, not surging as in Copernicus, and heaving up as it cooled into
+one great central cone, but seething as molten lead does in a crucible,
+little bubbles bursting here and there into minute craters; and this is
+the explanation given of them by astronomers.
+
+"And now that you have seen the curious rugged face of the moon and its
+craters and mountains, you will want to know how all this has come
+about. We can only form theories on the point, except that everything
+shows that heat and volcanoes have in some way done the work, though no
+one has ever yet clearly proved that volcanic eruptions have taken place
+in our time. We must look back to ages long gone by for those mighty
+volcanic eruptions which hurled out stones and ashes from the great
+crater of Tycho, and formed the vast seas of lava in Copernicus and
+Plato.
+
+"And when these were over, and the globe was cooling down rapidly, so
+that mountain ranges were formed by the wrinkling and rending of the
+surface, was there then any life on the moon? Who can tell? Our magic
+glasses can reveal what now is, so far as distance will allow; but what
+has been, except where the rugged traces remain, we shall probably never
+know. What we now see is a dead worn-out planet, on which we cannot
+certainly trace any activity except that of heat in the past. That there
+is no life there now, at any rate of the kind on our own earth, we are
+almost certain; first, because we can nowhere find traces of water,
+clouds, nor even mist, and without moisture no life like ours is
+possible; and secondly, because even if there is, as perhaps there may
+be, a thin ocean of gas round the moon there is certainly no atmosphere
+such as surrounds our globe.
+
+"One fact which proves this is, that there are no half-shadows on the
+moon. If you look some night at the mountains and craters during her
+first and second quarters, you will be startled to see what heavy
+shadows they cast, not with faint edges dying away into light, but sharp
+and hard (see Figs. 6-8), so that you pass, as it were by one step, from
+shadow to sunshine. This in itself is enough to show that there is no
+air to scatter the sunlight and spread it into the edges of the shade as
+happens on our earth; but there are other and better proofs. One of
+these is, that during an eclipse of the sun there is no reflection of
+his light round the dark moon as there would be if the moon had an
+atmosphere; another is that the spectroscope, that wonderful instrument
+which shows us invisible gases, gives no hint of air around the moon;
+and another is the sudden disappearance or _occultation_ of a star
+behind the moon, such as I hope to see in a few minutes.
+
+"See here! take the small hand telescope and turn it on to the moon's
+face while I take my place at the large one, and I will tell you what to
+look for. You know that at sunset we see the sun for some time after it
+has dipped below the horizon, because the rays of light which come from
+it are bent in our atmosphere and brought to our eyes, forming in them
+the image of the sun which is already gone. Now in a short time the moon
+which we are watching will be darkened by our earth coming between it
+and the sun, and while it is quite dark it will pass over a little
+bright star. In fact to us the star will appear to set behind the dark
+moon as the sun sets below the horizon, and if the moon had an
+atmosphere like ours, the rays from the star would be bent in it and
+reach our eyes after the star was gone, so that it would only disappear
+gradually. Astronomers have always observed, however, that the star is
+lost to sight quite suddenly, showing that there is no ocean of air
+round the moon to bend the light-rays."
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 9.
+
+Diagram of total eclipse of the moon.
+
+S, Sun. E, Earth. M, Moon passing into the earth's shadow and passing
+out at M'.
+
+R, R', Lines meeting at a point U, U' behind the earth and enclosing a
+space within which all the direct rays of the sun are intercepted by the
+earth, causing a black darkness or _umbra_.
+
+R, P and R', P', Lines marking a space within which, behind the earth,
+part of the sun's rays are cut off, causing a half-shadow or _penumbra_,
+P, P'.
+
+_a_, _a_, Points where a few of the sun's rays are bent or refracted in
+the earth's atmosphere, so that they pass along the path marked by the
+dotted lines and shed a lurid light on the sun's face.]
+
+Here the magician paused, for a slight dimness on the lower right-hand
+side of the moon warned him that she was entering into the _penumbra_ or
+half-shadow (see Fig. 9) caused by the earth cutting off part of the
+sun's rays; and soon a deep black shadow creeping over Aristarchus and
+Plato showed that she was passing into that darker space or _umbra_
+where the body of the earth is completely between her and the sun and
+cuts off all his rays. All, did I say? No! not all. For now was seen a
+beautiful sight, which would prove to any one who saw our earth from a
+great distance that it has a deep ocean of air round it.
+
+It was a clear night, with a cloudless sky, and as the deep shadow crept
+slowly over the moon's face, covering the Lunar Apennines and
+Copernicus, and stealing gradually across the brilliant streaks of Tycho
+till the crater itself was swallowed up in darkness, a strange lurid
+light began to appear. The part of the moon which was eclipsed was not
+wholly dark, but tinted with a very faint bluish-green light, which
+changed almost imperceptibly, as the eclipse went on, to rose-red, and
+then to a fiery copper-coloured glow as the moon crept entirely into the
+shadow and became all dark. The lad watching through his small telescope
+noted this weird light, and wondered, as he saw the outlines of the
+Apennines and of several craters dimly visible by it, though the moon
+was totally eclipsed. He noted, but was silent. He would not disturb the
+Principal, for the important moment was at hand, as this dark
+copper-coloured moon, now almost invisible, drew near to the star over
+which it was to pass.
+
+This little star, really a glorious sun billions of miles away behind
+the moon, was perhaps the centre of another system of worlds as unknown
+to us as we to them, and the fact of our tiny moon crossing between it
+and our earth would matter as little as if a grain of sand was blown
+across the heavens. Yet to the watchers it was a great matter--would the
+star give any further clue to the question of an atmosphere round the
+moon? Would its light linger even for a moment, like the light of the
+setting sun? Nearer and nearer came the dark moon; the star shone
+brilliantly against its darkness; one second and it was gone. The long
+looked-for moment had passed, and the magician turned from his
+instrument with a sigh. "I have learnt nothing new, Alwyn," said he,
+"but at least it is satisfactory to have seen for ourselves the proof
+that there is no perceptible atmosphere round the moon. We need wait no
+longer, for before the star reappears on the other side the eclipse will
+be passing away."
+
+"But, master," burst forth the lad, now the silence was broken, "tell me
+why did that strange light of many tints shine upon the dark moon?"
+
+"Did you notice it, Alwyn?" said the Principal, with a pleased smile.
+"Then our evening's work is not lost, for you have made a real
+observation for yourself. That light was caused by the few rays of the
+sun which grazed the edge of our earth passing through the ocean of air
+round it (see Fig. 9). There they were refracted or bent, and so were
+thrown within the shadow cast by our earth, and fell upon the moon. If
+there were such a person as a 'man in the moon,' that lurid light would
+prove to him that our earth has an atmosphere. The cause of the tints is
+the same which gives us our sunset colours, because as the different
+coloured waves which make white light are absorbed one by one, passing
+through the denser atmosphere, the blue are cut off first, then the
+green, then the yellow, till only the orange and red rays reached the
+centre of the shadow, where the moon was darkest. But this is too
+difficult a subject to begin at midnight."
+
+So saying, he lighted his lamp, and covering the object-glass of his
+telescope with its pasteboard cap, detached the instrument from the
+clockwork, and the master and his pupil went down the turret stairs and
+past through the room below. As they did so they heard in the distance a
+scuffling noise like that of rats in the wall. A smile passed over the
+face of the Principal, for he knew that his young pupils, who had been
+making their observations in the gallery above, were hurrying back to
+their beds.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+MAGIC GLASSES, AND HOW TO USE THEM
+
+
+[Illustration]
+
+The sun shone brightly into the science class-room at mid-day. No gaunt
+shadows nor ghostly moonlight now threw a spell on the magic chamber
+above. The instruments looked bright and business-like, and the
+Principal, moving amongst them, heard the subdued hum of fifty or more
+voices rising from below. It was the lecture hour, and the subject for
+the day was, "Magic glasses, and how to use them." As the large clock in
+the hall sounded twelve, the Principal gathered up a few stray lenses
+and prisms he had selected, and passed down the turret stair to his
+platform. Behind him were arranged his diagrams, before him on the table
+stood various instruments, and the rows of bright faces beyond looked up
+with one consent as the hum quieted down and he began his lecture.
+
+"I have often told you, boys, have I not? that I am a Magician. In my
+chamber near the sky I work spells as did the magicians of old, and by
+the help of my magic glasses I peer into the secrets of nature. Thus I
+read the secrets of the distant stars; I catch the light of wandering
+comets, and make it reveal its origin; I penetrate into the whirlpools
+of the sun; I map out the craters of the moon. Nor can the tiniest being
+on earth hide itself from me. Where others see only a drop of muddy
+water, that water brought into my magic chamber teems with thousands of
+active bodies, darting here and whirling there amid a meadow of tiny
+green plants floating in the water. Nay, my inquisitive glass sees even
+farther than this, for with it I can watch the eddies of water and green
+atoms going on in each of these tiny beings as they feed and grow.
+Again, if I want to break into the secrets of the rock at my feet, I
+have only to put a thin slice of it under my microscope to trace every
+crystal and grain; or, if I wish to learn still more, I subject it to
+fiery heat, and through the magic prisms of my spectroscope I read the
+history of the very substances of which it is composed. If I wish to
+study the treasures of the wide ocean, the slime from a rock-pool teems
+with fairy forms darting about in the live box imprisoned in a crystal
+home. If some distant stars are invisible even in the giant glasses of
+my telescope, I set another power to work, and make them print their own
+image on a photographic plate and so reveal their presence.
+
+"All these things you have seen through my magic glasses, and I
+promised you that one day I would explain to you how they work and do my
+bidding. But I must warn you that you must give all your attention;
+there is no royal road to my magician's power. Every one can attain to
+it, but only by taking trouble. You must open your eyes and ears, and
+use your intelligence to test carefully what your senses show you.
+
+"We have only to consider a little to see that we depend entirely upon
+our senses for our knowledge of the outside world. All kinds of things
+are going on around us, about which we know nothing, because our eyes
+are not keen enough to see, and our ears not sharp enough to hear them.
+Most of all we enjoy and study nature through our eyes, those windows
+which let in to us the light of heaven, and with it the lovely sights
+and scenes of earth; and which are no ordinary windows, but most
+wonderful structures adapted for conveying images to the brain. They are
+of very different power in different people, so that a long-sighted
+person sees a lovely landscape where a short-sighted one sees only a
+confused mist; while a short-sighted person can see minute things close
+to the eye better than a long-sighted one."
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 10.
+
+Eye-ball seen from the front. (After Le Gros Clark.)
+
+_w_, White of eye. _i_, Iris. _p_, Pupil.]
+
+"Let us try to understand this before we go on to artificial glasses,
+for it will help us to explain how these glasses show us many things we
+could never see without them. Here are two pictures of the human eyeball
+(Figs. 10 and 11), one as it appears from the front, and the other as we
+should see the parts if we cut an eyeball across from the front to the
+back. From these drawings we see that the eyeball is round; it only
+looks oval, because it is seen through the oval slit of the eyelids.
+It is really a hard, shining, white ball with a thick nerve cord
+(_on_, Fig. 11) passing out at the back, and a dark glassy mound
+_c_, _c_ in the centre of the white in front. In this mound we can
+easily distinguish two parts--first, the coloured _iris_ or elastic
+curtain (_i_, Fig. 10); and secondly, the dark spot or pupil _p_ in the
+centre. The iris is the part which gives the eye its colour; it is
+composed of a number of fibres, the outer ones radiating towards the
+centre, the inner ones forming a ring round the pupil; and behind these
+fibres is a coat of dark pigment or colouring matter, blue in some
+people, grey, brown, or black in others. When the light is very strong,
+and would pain the nerves inside if too much entered the pupil or window
+of the eye, then the ring of the iris contracts so as partly to close
+the opening. When there is very little light, and it is necessary to let
+in as much as possible, the ring expands and the pupil grows large. The
+best way to observe this is to look at a cat's eyes in the dusk, and
+then bring her near to a bright light; for the iris of a cat's eye
+contracts and expands much more than ours does."
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 11.
+
+Section of an eye looking at a pencil. (Adapted from Kirke.)
+
+_c_, _c_, Cornea. _w_, White of eye. _cm_, Ciliary muscle. _a_, _a_,
+Aqueous humour. _i_, _i_, Iris. _l_, _l_, Lens. _r_, _r_, Retina. _on_,
+Optic nerve. 1, 2, Pencil. 1', 2', Image of pencil on the retina.]
+
+"Now look at the second diagram (Fig. 11) and notice the chief points
+necessary in seeing. First you will observe that the pupil is not a mere
+hole; it is protected by a curved covering _c_. This is the cornea, a
+hard, perfectly transparent membrane, looking much like a curved
+watch-glass. Behind this is a small chamber filled with a watery fluid
+_a_, called the aqueous humour, and near the back of this chamber is the
+dark ring or iris _i_, which you saw from the front through the cornea
+and fluid. Close behind the iris again is the natural 'magic glass' of
+our eye, the crystalline lens _l_, which is composed of perfectly
+transparent fibres and has two rounded or convex surfaces like an
+ordinary magnifying glass. This lens rests on a cushion of a soft
+jelly-like substance _v_, called the vitreous humour, which fills the
+dark chamber or cavity of the eyeball and keeps it in shape, so that the
+retina _r_, which lines the chamber, is kept at a proper distance from
+the lens. This retina is a transparent film of very sensitive nerves; it
+forms a screen at the back of the chamber, and has a coating of very
+dark pigment or colouring matter behind it. Lastly, the nerves of the
+retina all meet in a bundle, called the optic nerve, and passing out of
+the eyeball at a point _on_, go to the brain. These are the chief parts
+we use in seeing; now how do we use them?
+
+"Suppose that a pencil is held in front of the eye at the distance at
+which we see small objects comfortably. Light is reflected from all
+parts of the surface of the pencil, and as the rays spread, a certain
+number enter the pupil of the eye. We will follow only two cones of
+light coming from the points 1 and 2 on the diagram Fig. 11. These you
+see enter the eye, each widely spread over the cornea _c_. They are bent
+in a little by this curved covering, and by the liquid behind it, while
+the iris cuts off the rays near the edges of the lens, which would be
+too much bent to form a clear image. The rest of the rays fall upon the
+lens _l_. In passing through this lens they are very much bent (or
+_refracted_) towards each other, so much so that by the time they reach
+the end of the dark chamber _v_, each cone of light has come to a point
+or focus 1', 2', and as rays of this kind have come from every point all
+over the pencil, exactly similar points are formed on the retina, and a
+real picture of the pencil is formed there between 1' and 2'."
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 12.
+
+Image of a candle-flame thrown on paper by a lens.]
+
+"We will make a very simple and pretty experiment to illustrate this.
+Darkening the room I light a candle, take a square of white paper in my
+hand, and hold a simple magnifying glass between the two (see Fig. 12)
+about three inches away from the candle. Then I shift the paper nearer
+and farther behind the lens, till we get a clear image of the
+candle-flame upon it. This is exactly what happens in our eye. I have
+drawn a dotted line _c_ round the lens and the paper on the diagram to
+represent the eyeball in which the image of the candle-flame would be on
+the retina instead of on the piece of paper. The first point you will
+notice is that the candle-flame is upside down on the paper, and if you
+turn back to Fig. 11 you will see why, for it is plain that the cones of
+light _cross_ in the lens _l_, 1 going to 1' and 2 to 2'. Every picture
+made on our retina is upside down.
+
+"But it is not there that we see it. As soon as the points of light from
+the pencil strike upon the retina, the thrill passes on along the optic
+nerve _on_, through the back of the eye to the brain; and our mind,
+following back the rays exactly as they have come through the lens, sees
+a pencil, outside the eye, right way upwards.
+
+"This is how we see with our eyes, which adjust themselves most
+beautifully to our needs. For example, not only is the iris always ready
+to expand or contract according as we need more or less light, but there
+is a special muscle, called the ciliary muscle (_cm_, Fig. 11), which
+alters the lens for us to see things far or near. In all, or nearly all,
+perfect eyes the lens is flatter in front than behind, and this enables
+us to see things far off by bringing the rays from them exactly to a
+focus on the retina. But when we look at nearer things the rays require
+to be more bent or refracted, so without any conscious effort on our
+part this ciliary muscle contracts and allows the lens to bulge out
+slightly in front. Instantly we have a stronger magnifier, and the rays
+are brought to the right focus on the retina, so that a clear and
+full-size image of the near object is formed. How little we think, as we
+turn our eyes from one thing to another, and observe, now the distant
+hills, now the sheep feeding close by; or, as night draws on, gaze into
+limitless space and see the stars millions upon millions of miles away,
+that at every moment the focus of our eye is altering, the iris is
+contracting or expanding, and myriads of images are being formed one
+after the other in that little dark chamber, through which pass all the
+scenes of the outer world!
+
+"Yet even this wonderful eye cannot show us everything. Some see farther
+than others, some see more minutely than others, according as the lens
+of the eye is flatter in one person and more rounded in another. But the
+most long-sighted person could never have discovered the planet Neptune,
+more than 2700 millions of miles distant from us, nor could the
+keenest-sighted have known of the existence of those minute and
+beautiful little plants, called diatoms, which live around us wherever
+water is found, and form delicate flint skeletons so infinitesimally
+small that thousands of millions go to form one cubic inch of the stone
+called tripoli, found at Bilin in Bohemia."
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 13.
+
+Arrow magnified by a convex lens.
+
+_a_, _b_, Real arrow. C, D, Magnifying-glass. A, B, Enlarged image of
+the arrow.]
+
+"It is here that our 'magic glasses' come to our assistance, and reveal
+to us what was before invisible. We learnt just now that we see near
+things by the lens of our eye becoming more rounded in front; but there
+comes a point beyond which the lens cannot bulge any more, so that when
+a thing is very tiny, and would have to be held very close to the eye
+for us to see it, the lens can no longer collect the rays to a focus, so
+we see nothing but a blur. More than 800 years ago an Arabian, named
+Alhazen, explained why rounded or convex glasses make things appear
+larger when placed before the eye. This glass which I hold in my hand
+is a simple magnifying-glass, such as we used for focusing the
+candle-flame. It bends the rays inwards from any small object (see the
+arrow _a_, _b_, Fig. 13) so that the lens of our eye can use them, and
+then, as we follow out the rays in straight lines to the place where we
+see clearly (at A, B), every point of the object is magnified, and we
+not only see it much larger, but every mark upon it is much more
+distinct. You all know how the little shilling magnifying-glasses you
+carry show the most lovely and delicate structures in flowers, on the
+wings of butterflies, on the head of a bee or fly, and, in fact, in all
+minute living things."
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 14.
+
+Student's microscope. _ep_, Eye-piece. _o_, _g_, Object-glass.]
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 15.
+
+Skeleton of a microscope, showing how an object is magnified.
+
+_o_, _l_, Object-lens. _e_, _g_, Eye-glass. _s_, _s_, Spicule.
+_s'_, _s'_, Magnified image of same in the tube. S, S, Image again
+enlarged by the lens of the eye-piece.]
+
+"But this is only our first step. Those diatoms we spoke of just now
+will only look like minute specks under even the strongest
+magnifying-glass. So we pass on to use two extra lenses to assist our
+eyes, and come to this compound microscope (Fig. 14) through which I
+have before now shown you the delicate markings on shells which were
+themselves so minute that you could not see them with the naked eye. Now
+we have to discover how the microscope performs this feat. Going back
+again for a minute to our candle and magnifying-glass (Fig. 12), you
+will find that the nearer you put the lens to the candle the farther
+away you will have to put the paper to get a clear image. When in a
+microscope we put a powerful lens _o_, _l_ close down to a very minute
+object, say a spicule of a flint sponge _s_, _s_, quite invisible to the
+unaided eye, the rays from this spicule are brought to a focus a long
+way behind it at _s'_, _s'_, making an enlarged image because the lines
+of light have been diverging ever since they crossed in the lens. If you
+could put a piece of paper at _s'_ _s'_, as you did in the candle
+experiment, you would see the actual image of the magnified spicule upon
+it. But as these points of light are only in an empty tube, they pass
+on, spreading out again from the image, as they did before from the
+spicule. Then another convex lens or eye-glass _e_, _g_ is put at the
+top of the microscope at the proper distance to bend these rays so that
+they enter our eye in nearly parallel lines, exactly as we saw in the
+ordinary magnifying-glass (Fig. 13), and our crystalline lens can then
+bring them to a focus on our retina.
+
+"By this time the spicule has been twice magnified; or, in other words,
+the rays of light coming from it have been twice bent towards each
+other, so that when our eye follows them out in straight lines they are
+widely spread, and we see every point of light so clearly that all the
+spots and markings on this minute spicule are as clear as if it were
+really as large as it looks to us.
+
+"This is simply the principle of the microscope. When you come to look
+at your own instruments, though they are very ordinary ones, you will
+find that the object-glass _o_, _l_ is made of three lenses, flat on the
+side nearest the tube, and each lens is composed of two kinds of glass
+in order to correct the unequal refraction of the rays, and prevent
+fringes of colour appearing at the edge of the lens. Then again the
+eye-piece will be a short tube with a lens at each end, and halfway
+between them a black ledge will be seen inside the tube which acts like
+the iris of our eye (_i_, Fig. 11) and cuts off the rays passing through
+the edges of the lens. All these are devices to correct faults in the
+microscope which our eye corrects for itself, and they have enabled
+opticians to make very powerful lenses.
+
+"Look now at the diagram (Fig. 16) showing a group of diatoms which you
+can see under the microscope after the lecture. Notice the lovely
+patterns, the delicate tracery, and the fine lines on the diatoms shown
+there. Yet each of these minute flint skeletons, if laid on a piece of
+glass by itself, would be quite invisible to the naked eye, while
+hundreds of them together only look like a faint mist on the slide on
+which they lie. Nor are they even here shown as much magnified as they
+might be; under a stronger power we should see those delicate lines on
+the diatoms broken up into minute round cups."
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 16.
+
+Fossil diatoms seen under the microscope. The largest of these is an
+almost imperceptible speck to the naked eye.]
+
+"Is it not wonderful and delightful to think that we are able to add in
+this way to the power of our eyes, till it seems as if there were no
+limit to the hidden beauties of the minute forms of our earth, if only
+we can discover them?
+
+"But our globe does not stand alone in the universe, and we want not
+only to learn all about everything we find upon it, but also to look out
+into the vast space around us and discover as much as we can about the
+myriads of suns and planets, comets and meteorites, star-mists and
+nebulae, which are to be found there. Even with the naked eye we can
+admire the grand planet Saturn, which is more than 800 millions of miles
+away, and this in itself is very marvellous. Who would have thought that
+our tiny crystalline lens would be able to catch and focus rays, sent
+all this enormous distance, so as actually to make a picture on our
+retina of a planet, which, like the moon, is only sending back to us the
+light of the sun? For, remember, the rays which come to us from Saturn
+must have travelled twice 800 millions of miles--884 millions from the
+sun to the planet, and less or more from the planet back to us,
+according to our position at the time. But this is as nothing when
+compared to the enormous distances over which light travels from the
+stars to us. Even the nearest star we know of, is at least twenty
+_millions_ of _millions_ of miles away, and the light from it, though
+travelling at the rate of 186,300 miles in a second, takes four years
+and four months to reach us, while the light from others, which we can
+see without a telescope, is between twenty and thirty years on its road.
+Does not the thought fill us with awe, that our little eye should be
+able to span such vast distances?
+
+"But we are not yet nearly at the end of our wonder, for the same power
+which devised our eye gave us also the mind capable of inventing an
+instrument which increases the strength of that eye till we can actually
+see stars so far off that their light takes _two thousand years_ coming
+to our globe. If the microscope delights us in helping us to see things
+invisible without it, because they are so small, surely the telescope is
+fascinating beyond all other magic glasses when we think that it brings
+heavenly bodies, thousands of billions of miles away, so close to us
+that we can examine them."
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 17.
+
+An astronomical telescope.
+
+_ep_, Eye-piece. _og_, Object-glass. _f_, Finder.]
+
+"A Telescope (Fig. 17) can, like the microscope, be made of only two
+glasses: an object-glass to form an image in the tube and a magnifying
+eye-piece to enlarge it. But there is this difference, that the object
+lens of a microscope is put close down to a minute object, so that the
+rays fall upon it at a wide angle, and the image formed in the tube is
+very much larger than the object outside. In the telescope, on the
+contrary, the thing we look at is far off, so that the rays fall on the
+object-glass at such a very narrow angle as to be practically parallel,
+and the image in the tube is of course _very, very_ much smaller than
+the house, or church, or planet it pictures. What the object-glass of
+the telescope does for us, is to bring a small _real image_ of an object
+very far off close to us in the tube of the telescope so that we can
+examine it.
+
+"Think for a moment what this means. Imagine that star we spoke of (p.
+41), whose light, travelling 186,300 miles in one second, still takes
+2000 years to reach us. Picture the tiny waves of light crossing the
+countless billions of miles of space during those two thousand years,
+and reaching us so widely spread out that the few faint rays which
+strike our eye are quite useless, and for us that star has no existence;
+we cannot see it. Then go and ask the giant telescope, by turning the
+object-glass in the direction where that star lies in infinite space.
+The widespread rays are collected and come to a minute bright image in
+the dark tube. You put the eye-piece to this image, and there, under
+your eye, is a shining point: this is the image of the star, which
+otherwise would be lost to you in the mighty distance.
+
+"Can any magic tale be more marvellous, or any thought grander, or more
+sublime than this? From my little chamber, by making use of the laws of
+light, which are the same wherever we turn, we can penetrate into depths
+so vast that we are not able even to measure them, and bring back unseen
+stars to tell us the secrets of the mighty universe. As far as the stars
+are concerned, whether we see them or not depends entirely upon the
+number of rays collected by the object-glass; for at such enormous
+distances the rays have no angle that we can measure, and magnify as
+you will, the brightest star only remains a point of light. It is in
+order to collect enough rays that astronomers have tried to have larger
+and larger object-glasses; so that while a small good hand telescope,
+such as you use, may have an object-glass measuring only an inch and a
+quarter across, some of the giant telescopes have lenses of two and a
+half feet, or thirty inches, diameter. These enormous lenses are very
+difficult to make and manage, and have many faults, therefore
+astronomical telescopes are often made with curved mirrors to _reflect_
+the rays, and bring them to a focus instead of _refracting_ them as
+curved lenses do.
+
+"We see, then, that one very important use of the telescope is to bring
+objects into view which otherwise we would never see; for, as I have
+already said, though we bring the stars into sight, we cannot magnify
+them. But whenever an object is near enough for the rays to fall even at
+a very small perceptible angle on the object-glass, then we can magnify
+them; and the longer the telescope, and the stronger the eye-piece, the
+more the object is magnified.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 18.
+
+Skeletons of telescopes.
+
+A, A one-foot telescope with a three-inch eye-piece. B, A two-foot
+telescope with a three-inch eye-piece. _e_, _p_, Eye-piece. _o_, _g_,
+Object-glass. _r_, _r_, Rays which enter the telescopes and crossing at
+_x_ form an image at _i_, _i_, which is magnified by the lens _e_, _p_.
+The angles _r_, _x_, _r_ and _i_, _x_, _i_ are the same. In A the angle
+_i_, _o_, _i_ is four times greater than that of _i_, _x_, _i_. In B it
+is eight times greater.]
+
+"I want you to understand the meaning of this, for it is really very
+simple, only it requires a little thought. Here are skeleton drawings of
+two telescopes (Fig. 18), one double the length of the other. Let us
+suppose that two people are using them to look at an arrow on a
+weathercock a long distance off. The rays of light _r_, _r_ from the
+two ends of the arrow will enter both telescopes at the same angle
+_r_, _x_, _r_, cross in the lens, and pass on at _exactly the same
+angle_ into the tubes. So far all is alike, but now comes the
+difference. In the short telescope A the object-glass must be of such a
+curve as to bring the cones of light in each ray to a focus at a
+distance of _one foot_ behind it,[1] and there a small image _i_, _i_ of
+the arrow is formed. But B being twice the length, allows the lens
+to be less curved, and the image to be formed _two feet_ behind the
+object-glass; and as the rays _r_, _r_ have been _diverging_ ever since
+they crossed at _x_, the real image of the arrow formed at _i_, _i_ is
+twice the size of the same image in A. Nevertheless, if you could put a
+piece of paper at _i_, _i_ in both telescopes, and look through the
+_object-glass_ (which you cannot actually do, because your head would
+block out the rays), the arrow would appear the same size in both
+telescopes, because one would be twice as far off from you as the other,
+and the angle _i_, _x_, _i_ is the same in both."
+
+ [1] In our Fig. 18 the distances are inches instead of feet, but the
+ proportions are the same.
+
+"But by going to the proper end of the telescope you can get quite near
+the image, and can see and magnify it, if you put a strong lens to
+collect the rays from it to a focus. This is the use of the eye-piece,
+which in our diagram is placed at a quarter of a foot or three inches
+from the image in both telescopes. Now that we are close to the images,
+the divergence of the points _i_, _i_ makes a great difference. In the
+small telescope, in which the image is only _one foot_ behind the
+object-glass, the eye-piece being a quarter of a foot from it, is four
+times nearer, so the angle _i_, _o_, _i_ is four times the angle
+_i_, _x_, _i_, and the man looking through it sees the image magnified
+_four times_. But in the longer telescope the image is _two feet_ behind
+the lens, while the eye-piece is, as before, a quarter of a foot from
+it. Thus the eyepiece is now eight times nearer, so the angle
+_i_, _o_, _i_ is eight times the angle _i_, _x_, _i_, and the observer
+sees the image magnified _eight times_.
+
+"In real telescopes, where the difference between the focal length of
+the object-glass and that of the eye-glass can be made enormously
+greater, the magnifying power is quite startling, only the object-glass
+must be large, so as to collect enough rays to bear spreading widely.
+Even in your small telescopes, with a focus of eighteen inches, and an
+object-glass measuring one and a quarter inch across, we can put on a
+quarter of an inch eye-piece, and so magnify seventy-two times; while in
+my observatory telescope, eight feet or ninety-six inches long, an
+eye-piece of half an inch magnifies 192 times, and I can put on a
+1/8-inch eye-piece and magnify 768 times! And so we can go on
+lengthening the focus of the object-glass and shortening the focus of
+the eye-piece, till in Lord Rosse's gigantic fifty-six-foot telescope,
+in which the image is fifty-four feet (648 inches) behind the
+object-glass, an eye-piece one-eighth of an inch from the image
+magnifies 5184 times! These giant telescopes, however, require an
+enormous object-glass or mirror, for the points of light are so spread
+out in making the large image that it is very faint unless an enormous
+number of rays are collected. Lord Rosse's telescope has a reflecting
+mirror measuring six feet across, and a man can walk upright in the
+telescope tube. The most powerful telescope yet made is that at the Lick
+Observatory, on Mount Hamilton, in California. It is fifty-six and a
+half feet long, the object-lens measures thirty-six inches across. A
+star seen through this telescope appears 2000 times as bright as when
+seen with the naked eye.
+
+"You need not, however, wait for an opportunity to look through giant
+telescopes, for my small student's telescope, only four feet long, which
+we carry out on to the lawn, will show you endless unseen wonders; while
+your hand telescopes, and even a common opera-glass, will show many
+features on the face of the moon, and enable you to see the crescent of
+Venus, Jupiter's moons, and Saturn's rings, besides hundreds of stars
+unseen by the naked eye.
+
+"Of course you will understand that Fig. 18 only shows the _principle_
+of the telescope. In all good instruments the lenses and other parts are
+more complicated; and in a terrestrial telescope, for looking at
+objects on the earth, another lens has to be put in to turn them right
+way up again. In looking at the sky it does not matter which way up we
+see a planet or a star, so the second glass is not needed, and we lose
+light by using it.
+
+"We have now three magic glasses to work for us--the magnifying-glass,
+the microscope, and the telescope. Besides these, however, we have two
+other helpers, if possible even more wonderful. These are the
+Photographic camera and the Spectroscope."
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 19.
+
+Photographic camera.
+
+_l_, _l_, Lenses. _s_, _s_, Screen cutting off diverging rays. _c_, _c_,
+Sliding box. _p_, _p_, Picture formed.]
+
+"Now that we thoroughly understand the use of lenses, I need scarcely
+explain this photographic camera (Fig. 19), for it is clearly an
+artificial eye. In place of the _crystalline lens_ (compare with Fig.
+11) the photographer uses one, or generally two lenses _l_, _l_, with a
+black ledge or stop _s_ between them, which acts like the iris in
+cutting off the rays too near the edge of the lens. The dark camera _c_
+answers to the _dark chamber_ of the eyeball, and the plate _p_, _p_ at
+the back of the chamber, which is made sensitive by chemicals, answers
+our _retina_. The box is formed of two parts, sliding one within the
+other at _c_, so as to place the plate at a proper distance from the
+lens, and then a screw adjusts the focus more exactly by bringing the
+front lens back or forward, instead of altering the curve as the
+_ciliary muscle_ does in our eye. The difference between the two
+instruments is that in our eye the message goes to the brain, and the
+image disappears when we turn our eyes away from the object; but in the
+camera the waves of light work upon the chemicals, and the image can be
+fixed and remain for ever.
+
+"But the camera has at least one weak point. The screen at the back is
+not curved like our retina, but must be flat because of printing off the
+pictures, and therefore the parts of the photograph near the edge are a
+little out of proportion.
+
+"In many ways, however, this photographic eye is a more faithful
+observer than our own, and helps us to make more accurate pictures. For
+instance, instantaneous photographs have been taken of a galloping
+horse, and we find that the movements are very different from what we
+thought we saw with our eye, because our retina does not throw off one
+impression after another quickly enough to be quite certain we see each
+curve truly in succession. Again, the photograph of a face gives minute
+curves and lines, lights and shadows, far more perfectly than even the
+best artist can see them, and when the picture is magnified we see more
+and more details which escaped us before.
+
+"But it is especially when attached to the microscope or the telescope
+that the photographic apparatus tells us such marvellous secrets;
+giving us, for instance, an accurate picture of the most minute
+water-animal quite invisible to the naked eye, so that when we enlarge
+the photograph any one can see the beautiful markings, the finest fibre,
+or the tiniest granule; or affording us accurate pictures, such as the
+one at p. 19 of the face of the moon, and bringing stars into view which
+we cannot otherwise see even with the strongest telescope.
+
+"Our own eye has many weaknesses. For example, when we look through the
+telescope at the sky we can only fix our attention on one part at once,
+and afterwards on another; and the picture which we see in this way, bit
+by bit, we must draw as best we can. But if we put a sensitive
+photographic plate into the telescope just at the point (_i_, _i_, Fig.
+18), where the _image_ of the sky is focused, this plate gives
+attention, so to speak, to the whole picture at once, and registers
+every point exactly as it is; and this picture can be kept and enlarged
+so that every detail can be seen.
+
+"Then, again, if we look at faint stars, they do not grow any brighter
+as we look. Each ray sends its message to the brain, and that is all; we
+cannot heap them up in our eye, and, indeed, after a time we see less,
+because our nerves grow tired. But on a photographic plate in a
+telescope, each ray in its turn does a little work upon the chemicals,
+and the longer the plate remains, the stronger the picture becomes. When
+wet plates were used they could not be left long, but since dry plates
+have been invented, with a film of chemically prepared gelatine, they
+can be left for hours in the telescope, which is kept by clockwork
+accurately opposite to the same objects. In this way thousands of faint
+stars, which we cannot see with the strongest telescope, creep into view
+as their feeble rays work over and over again on the same spot; and, as
+the brighter stars as well as the faint ones are all the time making
+their impression stronger, when the plate comes out each one appears in
+its proper strength. On the other hand, very bright objects often become
+blurred by a long exposure, so that we have sometimes to sacrifice the
+clearness of a bright object in order to print faint objects clearly.
+
+"We now come to our last magic glass--the Spectroscope; and the hour has
+slipped by so fast that I have very little time left to speak of it. But
+this matters less as we have studied it before.[1] I need now only
+remind you of some of the facts. You will remember that when we passed
+sunlight through a three-sided piece of glass called a prism, we broke
+up a ray of white light into a line of beautiful colours gradually
+passing from red, through orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, to
+violet, and that these follow in the same order as we see them in the
+rainbow or in the thin film of a soap-bubble. By various experiments we
+proved that these colours are separated from each other because the many
+waves which make up white light are of different sizes, so that because
+the waves, of red light are slow and heavy, they lag behind when bent in
+the three-sided glass, while the rapid violet waves are bent more out of
+their road and run to the farther end of the line, the other colours
+ranging themselves between."
+
+ [1] _Fairyland of Science_, Lecture II.; and _Short History of Natural
+ Science_, chapter xxxiv.
+
+"Now when the light falls through the open window, or through a round
+hole or _large_ slit, the images of the hole made by each coloured wave
+overlap each other very much, and the colours in the spectrum or
+coloured band are crowded together. But when in the spectroscope we pass
+the ray of light through a very narrow slit, each coloured image of the
+upright slit overlaps the next upright image only very little. By using
+several prisms one after the other (see Fig. 21), these upright coloured
+lines are separated more and more till we get a very long band or
+spectrum. Yet, as you know from our experiments with the light of a
+glowing wire or of molten iron, however much you spread out the light
+given by a solid or liquid, you can never separate these coloured lines
+from each other. It is only when you throw the light of a glowing gas or
+vapour into the slit that you get a few bright lines standing out alone.
+This is because _all_ the rays of white light are present in glowing
+solids and liquids, and they follow each other too closely to be
+separated. But a gas, such as glowing hydrogen for example, gives out
+only a few separate rays, which, pouring through the slit, throw red,
+greenish-blue, and dark blue lines on the screen. Thus you have seen the
+double, orange-yellow sodium line (3, Plate I.) which starts out at once
+when salt is held in a flame and its light thrown into the spectroscope,
+and the red line of potassium vapour under the same treatment; and we
+shall observe these again when we study the coloured lights of the sun
+and stars."
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 20.
+
+Kirchhoff's spectroscope.
+
+A, The telescope which receives the ray of light through the slit in O.]
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 21.
+
+Passage of rays through the spectroscope.
+
+S, S', Slit through which the light falls on the prisms. 1, 2, 3, 4,
+Prisms in which the rays are dispersed more and more. _a_, _b_, Screen
+receiving the spectrum, of which the seven principal colours are
+marked.]
+
+"We see, then, that the work of our magic glass, the spectroscope, is
+simply to sift the waves of light, and that these waves, from their
+colour and their position in the long spectrum, actually tell us what
+glowing gases have started them on their road. Is not this like magic?
+I take a substance made of I know not what; I break it up, and, melting
+it in the intense heat of an electric spark, throw its light into the
+spectroscope. Then, as I examine this light after it has been spread out
+by the prisms, I can actually read by unmistakable lines what metals or
+non-metals it contains. Nay, more; when I catch the light of a star, or
+even of a faint nebula, in my telescope, and pass it through these
+prisms, there, written up on the magic-coloured band, I read off the
+gases which are glowing in that star-sun or star-dust billions of miles
+away.
+
+"Now, boys, I have let you into the secrets of my five magic
+glasses--the magnifying-glass, the microscope, the telescope, the
+photographic camera, and the spectroscope. With these and the help of
+chemistry you can learn to work all my spells. You can peep into the
+mysteries of the life of the tiniest being which moves unseen under your
+feet; you can peer into that vast universe, which we can never visit so
+long as our bodies hold us down to our little earth; you can make the
+unseen stars print their spots of light on the paper you hold in your
+hand, by means of light-waves, which left them hundreds of years ago; or
+you can sift this light in your spectroscope, and make it tell you what
+substances were glowing in that star when they were started on their
+road. All this you can do on one condition, namely, that you seek
+patiently to know the truth.
+
+"Stories of days long gone by tell us of true magicians and false
+magicians, and the good or evil they wrought. Of these I know nothing,
+but I do know this, that the value of the spells you can work with my
+magic glasses depends entirely upon whether you work patiently,
+accurately, and honestly. If you make careless, inaccurate experiments,
+and draw hasty conclusions, you will only do bad work, which it may take
+others years to undo; but if you question your instruments honestly and
+carefully, they will answer truly and faithfully. You may make many
+mistakes, but one experiment will correct the other; and while you are
+storing up in your own mind knowledge which lifts you far above this
+little world, or enables you to look deep below the outward surface of
+life, you may add your little group of facts to the general store, and
+help to pave the way to such grand discoveries as those of Newton in
+astronomy, Bunsen and Kirchhoff in spectrum analysis, and Darwin in the
+world of life."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+FAIRY RINGS AND HOW THEY ARE MADE
+
+
+[Illustration]
+
+It was a lovely warm day in September, the golden corn had been cut and
+carted, and the waggons of the farmers around were free for the use of
+the college lads in their yearly autumn holiday. There they stood in a
+long row, one behind the other in the drive round the grounds, each with
+a pair of sleek, powerful farm-horses, and the waggoners beside them
+with their long whips ornamented with coloured ribbons; and as each
+waggon drew up before the door, it filled rapidly with its merry load
+and went on its way.
+
+They had a long drive of seven miles before them, for they were going to
+cross the wild moor, and then descend gradually along a fairly good road
+to the more wooded and fertile country. Their object that day was to
+reach a certain fairy dell known to a few only among the party as one of
+the loveliest spots in Devon. It was a perfect day for a picnic. As they
+drove over the wide stretches of moorland, with tors to right and tors
+to the left, the stunted furze bushes growing here and there glistened
+with spiders' webs from which the dew had not yet disappeared, and
+mosses in great variety carpeted the ground, from the lovely
+thread-mosses, with their scarlet caps, to the pale sphagnum of the
+bogs, where a halt was made for some of the botanists of the party to
+search for the little Sundew (_Drosera rotundifolia_). Though this
+little plant had now almost ceased to flower, it was not difficult to
+recognise by its rosette of leaves glistening with sticky glands which
+it spreads out in many of the Dartmoor bogs to catch the tiny flies and
+suck out their life's blood, and several specimens were uprooted and
+carefully packed away to plant in moist moss at home.
+
+From this bog onwards the road ran near by one of the lovely streams
+which feed the rivers below, and, passing across a bridge covered with
+ivy, led through a small forest of stunted trees round which the
+woodbine clung, hanging down its crimson berries, and the bracken fern,
+already putting on its brown and yellow tints, grew tall and thick on
+either side. Then, as they passed out of the wood, they came upon the
+dell, a piece of wild moorland lying in a hollow between two granite
+ridges, with large blocks of granite strewn over it here and there, and
+furze bushes growing under their shelter, still covered with yellow
+blossoms together with countless seed-bearing pods, which the
+youngsters soon gathered for the shiny-black seeds within them.
+
+Here the waggons were unspanned, the horses tethered out, the food
+unpacked, and preparations for the picnic soon in full swing. Just at
+this moment, however, a loud shout from one part of the dell called
+every one's attention. "The fairy rings! the fairy rings! we have found
+the fairy rings!" and there truly on the brown sward might be seen three
+delicate green rings, the fresh sprouting grass growing young and tender
+in perfect circles measuring from six feet to nearly three yards across.
+
+"What are they?" The question came from many voices at once, but it was
+the Principal who answered.
+
+"Why, do you not know that they are pixie circles, where the 'elves of
+hills, brooks, standing lakes, and groves' hold their revels, whirling
+in giddy round, and making the rings, 'whereof the ewe not bites'? Have
+you forgotten how Mrs. Quickly, in the _Merry Wives of Windsor_, tells
+us that
+
+ "'nightly, meadow-fairies, look you sing,
+ Like to the Garter's compass, in a ring:
+ The expressure that it bears, green let it be,
+ More fertile-fresh than all the field to see'?
+
+"If we are magicians and work spells under magic glasses, why should not
+the pixies work spells on the grass? I brought you here to-day on
+purpose to see them. Which of you now can name the pixie who makes
+them?"
+
+A deep silence followed. If any knew or guessed the truth of the matter,
+they were too shy to risk making a mistake.
+
+"Be off with you then," said the Principal, "and keep well away from
+these rings all day, that you may not disturb the spell. But come back
+to me before we return at night, and perhaps I may show you the
+wonder-working pixie, and we may take him home to examine under the
+microscope."
+
+The day passed as such happy days do, and the glorious harvest moon had
+risen over the distant tors before the horses were spanned and the
+waggons ready. But the Principal was not at the starting place, and
+looking round they saw him at the farther end of the dell.
+
+"Gently, gently," he cried, as there was one general rush towards him;
+"look where you tread, for I stand within a ring of fairies!"
+
+And then they saw that just outside the green circle in which he stood,
+forming here and there a broken ring, were patches of a beautiful tiny
+mushroom, each of which raised its pale brown umbrella in the bright
+moonlight.
+
+"Here are our fairies, boys. I am going to take a few home where they
+can be spared from the ring, and to-morrow we will learn their history."
+
+ * * * * *
+
+The following day saw the class-room full, and from the benches eager
+eyes were turned to the eight windows, in each of which stood one of the
+elder boys at his microscope ready for work. For under those microscopes
+the Principal always arranged some object referred to in his lecture and
+figured in diagrams on the walls, and it was the duty of each boy, after
+the lecture was over, to show and explain to the class all the points
+of the specimen under his care. These boys were always specially envied,
+for though the others could, it is true, follow all the descriptions
+from the diagrams, yet these had the plant or animal always under their
+eye. Discussion was at this moment running high, for there was a great
+uncertainty of opinion as to whether a mushroom could be really called a
+plant when it had no leaves or flowers. All at once the hush came, as
+the Principal stepped into his desk and began:--
+
+"Life is hard work, boys, and there is no being in this world which has
+not to work for its living. You all know that a plant grows by taking in
+gases and water, and working them up into sap and living tissue by the
+help of the sunshine and the green matter in their leaves; and you know,
+too, that the world is so full of green plants that hundreds and
+thousands of young seedlings can never get a living, but are stifled in
+their babyhood or destroyed before they can grow up.
+
+"Now there are many dark, dank places in the world where plants cannot
+get enough sunlight and air to make green colouring matter and
+manufacture their own food. And so it comes to pass that a certain class
+of plants have found another way of living, by taking their food ready
+made from other decaying plants and animals, and so avoiding the
+necessity of manufacturing it for themselves. These plants can live
+hidden away in dark cellars and damp cupboards, in drains and pipes
+where no light ever enters, under a thick covering of dead leaves in the
+forest, under fallen trunks and mossy stones; in fact, wherever
+decaying matter, whether of plant or animal, can be found for them to
+feed upon.
+
+"It is to this class, called _fungi_, which includes all mushrooms and
+moulds, mildews, smuts, and ferments, that the mushroom belongs which we
+found yesterday making the fairy rings. And, in truth, we were not so
+far wrong when we called them pixies or imps, for many of them are
+indeed imps of mischief, which play sorry pranks in our stores at home
+and in the fields and forest abroad. They grow on our damp bread, or
+cheese, or pickles; they destroy fruit and corn, hop and vine, and even
+take the life of insects and other animals. Yet, on the other hand, they
+are useful in clearing out unhealthy nooks and corners, and purifying
+the air; and they can be made to do good work by those who know how to
+use them; for without ferments we could have neither wine, beer, nor
+vinegar, nor even the yeast which lightens our bread.
+
+"I am going to-day to introduce you to this large vagabond class of
+plants, that we may see how they live, grow, and spread, what good and
+bad work they do, and how they do it. And before we come to the
+mushrooms, which you know so well, we must look at the smaller forms,
+which do all their work above ground, so that we can observe them. For
+the _fungi_ are to be found almost everywhere. The film growing over
+manure-heaps, the yeast plant, the wine fungus, and the vinegar plant;
+the moulds and mildews covering our cellar-walls and cupboards, or
+growing on decayed leaves and wood, on stale fruit, bread, or jam, or
+making black spots on the leaves of the rose, the hop, or the vine; the
+potato fungus, eating into the potato in the dark ground and producing
+disease; the smut filling the grains of wheat and oats with disease, the
+ergot feeding on the rye, the rust which destroys beetroot, the rank
+toadstools and puffballs, the mushroom we eat, and the truffles which
+form even their fruit underground,--all these are _fungi_, or lowly
+plants which have given up making their own food in the sunlight, and
+take it ready made from the dung, the decaying mould, the root, the
+leaf, the fruit, or the germ on which they grow. Lastly, the diseases
+which kill the silkworm and the common house-fly, and even some of the
+worst skin diseases in man, are caused by minute plants of this class
+feeding upon their hosts."
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 22.
+
+Three forms of vegetable mould magnified.
+
+1, _Mucor Mucedo_. 2, _Aspergillus glaucus_. 3, _Penicillium glaucum_.]
+
+"In fact, the _fungi_ are so widely spread over all things living and
+dead, that there is scarcely anything free from them in one shape or
+another. The minute spores, now of one kind, now of another, float in
+the air, and settling down wherever they find suitable food, have
+nothing more to do than to feed, fatten, and increase, which they do
+with wonderful rapidity. Let us take as an example one of the moulds
+which covers damp leaves, and even the paste and jam in our cupboard. I
+have some here growing upon a basin of paste, and you see it forms a
+kind of dense white fur all over the surface, with here and there a
+bluish-green tinge upon it. This white fur is the common mould, _Mucor
+Mucedo_ (1, Fig. 22), and the green mould happens in this case to be
+another mould, _Penicillium glaucum_ (3, Fig. 22); but I must warn you
+that these minute moulds look very much alike until you examine them
+under the microscope, and though they are called white, blue, or green
+moulds, yet any one of them may be coloured at different times of its
+growth. Another very common and beautiful mould, _Aspergillus glaucus_
+(2, Fig. 22), often grows with Mucor on the top of jam.
+
+"All these plants begin with a spore or minute colourless cell of living
+matter (_s_, Fig. 23), which spends its energy in sending out tubes in
+all directions into the leaves, fruit, or paste on which it feeds. The
+living matter, flowing now this way now that, lays down the walls of its
+tubes as it flows, and by and by, here and there, a tube, instead of
+working into the paste, grows upwards into the air and swells at the tip
+into a colourless ball in which a number of minute seed-like bodies
+called spores are formed. The ball bursts, the spores fall out, and each
+one begins to form fresh tubes, and so little by little the mould grows
+denser and thicker by new plants starting in all directions.
+
+"Under the first microscope you will see a slide showing the tubes which
+spread through the paste, and which are called the _mycelium_ (_m_, Fig.
+23), and amongst it are three upright tubes, one just starting _a_,
+another with the fruit ball forming _b_, and a third _c_, which is
+bursting and throwing out the spores. The _Aspergillus_ and the
+_Penicillium_ differ from the _Mucor_ in having their spores naked and
+not enclosed in a spore-case. In _Penicillium_ they grow like the beads
+of a necklace one above the other on the top of the upright tube, and
+can very easily be separated (see Fig. 22); while _Aspergillus_, a most
+lovely silvery mould, is more complicated in the growth of its spores,
+for it bears them on many rows branching out from the top of the tube
+like the rays of a star."
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 23.
+
+_Mucor Mucedo_, greatly magnified. (After Sachs and Brefeld.)
+
+_m_, Mycelium, or tangle of threads. _a_, _b_, _c_, Upright tubes in
+different stages. _c_, Spore-case bursting and sending out spores. _s_,
+1, 2, 3, A growing spore, in different stages, starting a new mycelium.]
+
+"I want you to look at each of these moulds carefully under the
+microscope, for few people who hastily scrape a mould away, vexed to
+find it on food or damp clothing, have any idea what a delicate and
+beautiful structure lies under their hand. These moulds live on decaying
+matter, but many of the mildews, rusts, and other kinds of fungus, prey
+upon living plants such as the _smut_ of oats (_Ustilago carbo_), and
+the _bunt_ (_Tilletia caria_) which eats away the inside of the grains
+of wheat, while another fungus attacks its leaves. There is scarcely a
+tree or herb which has not one fungus to prey upon it, and many have
+several, as, for example, the common lime-tree, which is infested by
+seventy-four different fungi, and the oak by no less than 200.
+
+"So these colourless food-taking plants prey upon their neighbours,
+while they take their oxygen for breathing from air. The 'ferments,'
+however, which live _inside_ plants or fluids, take even their oxygen
+for breathing from their hosts.
+
+"If you go into the garden in summer and pluck an overripe gooseberry,
+which is bursting like this one I have here, you will probably find that
+the pulp looks unhealthy and rotten near the split, and the gooseberry
+will taste tart and disagreeable. This is because a small fungus has
+grown inside, and worked a change in the juice of the fruit. At first
+this fungus spread its tubes outside and merely _fed_ upon the fruit,
+using oxygen from the air in breathing; but by and by the skin gave way,
+and the fungus crept inside the gooseberry where it could no longer get
+any fresh air. In this dilemma it was forced to break up the sugar in
+the fruit and take the oxygen out of it, leaving behind only alcohol and
+carbonic acid which give the fermented taste to the fruit.
+
+"So the fungus-imp feeds and grows in nature, and when man gets hold of
+it he forces it to do the same work for a useful purpose, for the
+grape-fungus grows in the vats in which grapes are crushed and kept away
+from air, and tearing up the sugar, leaves alcohol behind in the
+grape-juice, which in this way becomes wine. So, too, the yeast-fungus
+grows in the malt and hop liquor, turning it into beer; its spores
+floating in the fluid and increasing at a marvellous rate, as any
+housewife knows who, getting yeast for her bread, tries to keep it in a
+corked bottle.
+
+"The yeast plant has never been found wild. It is only known as a
+cultivated plant, growing on prepared liquor. The brewer has to sow it
+by taking some yeast from other beer, or by leaving the liquor exposed
+to air in which yeast spores are floating; or it will sow itself in the
+same way in a mixture of water, hops, sugar, and salt, to which a
+handful of flour is added. It increases at a marvellous rate, one cell
+budding out of another, while from time to time the living matter in a
+cell will break up into four parts instead of two, and so four new cells
+will start and bud. A drop of yeast will very soon cover a glass slide
+with this tiny plant, as you will see under the second microscope, where
+they are now at work (Fig. 24)."
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 24.
+
+Yeast cells growing under the microscope. _a_, Single cells. _b_, Two
+cells forming by division. _c_, A group of cells where division is going
+on in all directions.]
+
+"But perhaps the most curious of all the minute fungi are those which
+grow inside insects and destroy them. At this time of year you may
+often see a dead fly sticking to the window-pane with a cloudy white
+ring round it; this poor fly has been killed by a little fungus called
+_Empusa muscae_. A spore from a former plant has fallen perhaps on the
+window-pane, or some other spot over which the fly has crawled, and
+being sticky has fixed itself under the fly's body. Once settled on a
+favourable spot it sends out a tube, and piercing the skin of the fly,
+begins to grow rapidly inside. There it forms little round cells one
+after the other, something like the yeast-cells, till it fills the whole
+body, feeding on its juices; then each cell sends a tube, like the
+upright tubes of the _Mucor_ (Fig. 23) out again through the fly's skin,
+and this tube bursts at the end, and so new spores are set free. It is
+these tubes, and the spores thrown from them, which you see forming a
+kind of halo round the dead fly as it clings to the pane. Other fungi in
+the same way kill the silkworm and the caterpillars of the cabbage
+butterfly. Nor is it only the lower animals which suffer. When we once
+realise that fungus spores are floating everywhere in the air, we can
+understand how the terrible microscopic fungi called _bacteria_ will
+settle on an open wound and cause it to fester if it is not properly
+dressed.
+
+"Thus we see that these minute fungi are almost everywhere. The larger
+ones, on the contrary, are confined to the fields and forests, damp
+walls and hollow trees; or wherever rotting wood, leaves, or manure
+provide them with sufficient nourishment. Few people have any clear
+ideas about the growth of a mushroom, except that the part we pick
+springs up in a single night. The real fact is, that a whole mushroom
+plant is nothing more than a gigantic mould or mildew, only that it is
+formed of many different shaped cells, and spreads its tubes
+_underground_ or through the trunks of trees instead of in paste or jam,
+as in the case of the mould."
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 25.
+
+Early stages of the mushroom. (After Sachs.)
+
+_m_, Mycelium. _b1-3_, Mushroom buds of different ages. _b4_, Button
+mushroom. _g_, Gills forming inside before lower attachment of the cap
+gives way at _v_.]
+
+"The part which we gather and call a mushroom, a toadstool, or a
+puffball is only the fruit, answering to the round balls of the mould.
+The rest of the plant is a thick network of tubes, which you will see
+under the third microscope. These tubes spread underground and suck in
+decayed matter from the earth; they form the _mycelium_ (_m_, Fig. 25)
+such as we found in the mould. The mushroom-growers call it 'mushroom
+spawn' because they use it to spread over the ground for new crops. Out
+of these underground tubes there springs up from time to time a swollen
+round body no bigger at first than a mustard seed (_b1_, Fig. 25). As it
+increases in size it comes above ground and grows into the mushroom or
+spore-case, answering to the round balls which contain the spores of the
+mould. At first this swollen body is egg-shaped, the top half being
+largest and broadest, and the fruit is then called a 'button-mushroom'
+_b4_. Inside this ball are now formed a series of folds made of long
+cells, some of which are soon to bear spores just as the tubes in the
+mould did, and while these are forming and ripening, a way out is
+preparing for them. For as the mushroom grows, the skin of the lower
+part of the ball (_v_, _b4_) is stretched more and more, till it can
+bear the strain no longer and breaks away from the stalk; then the ball
+expands into an umbrella, leaving a piece of torn skin, called the veil
+(_v_, Fig. 26), clinging to the stalk."
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 26.
+
+Later stages of the mushroom. (After Gautier.)
+
+1, Button mushroom stage. _c_, Cap. _v_, Veil. _g_, Gills.
+
+2, Full-grown mushroom, showing veil v after the cap is quite free, and
+the gills or lamellae _g_, of which the structure is shown in Fig. 27.]
+
+"All this happens in a single night, and the mushroom is complete, with
+a stem up the centre and a broad cap, under which are the folds which
+bear the spores. Thus much you can see for yourselves at any time by
+finding a place where mushrooms grow and looking for them late at night
+and early in the morning so as to get the different stages. But now we
+must turn to the microscope, and cutting off one of the folds, which
+branch out under the cap like the spokes of a wheel, take a slice across
+it (1, Fig. 27) and examine."
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 27.
+
+1, One of the gills or lamellae of the mushroom slightly magnified,
+showing the cells round the edge. _c_, Cells which do not bear spores.
+_fc_, Fertile cells. 2, A piece of the edge of the same powerfully
+magnified, showing how the spores _s_ grow out of the tip of the fertile
+cells _fc_.]
+
+"First, under a moderate power, you will see the cells forming the
+centre of the fold and the layer of long cells (_c_ and _fc_) which are
+closely packed all round the edge. Some of these cells project beyond
+the others, and it is they which bear the spores. We see this plainly
+under a very strong power when you can distinguish the sterile cells _c_
+and the fertile cells _fc_ projecting beyond them, and each bearing
+four spore-cells _s_ on four little horns at its tip.
+
+"These spores fall off very easily, and you can make a pretty experiment
+by cutting off a large mushroom head in the early morning and putting it
+flat upon a piece of paper. In a few hours, if you lift it very
+carefully, you will find a number of dark lines on the paper, radiating
+from a centre like the spokes of a wheel, each line being composed of
+the spores which have fallen from a fold as it grew ripe. They are so
+minute that many thousands would be required to make up the size of the
+head of an ordinary pin, yet if you gather the spores of the several
+kinds of mushroom, and examine them under a strong microscope, you will
+find that even these specks of matter assume different shapes in the
+various species.
+
+"You will be astonished too at the immense number of spores contained in
+a single mushroom head, for they are reckoned by millions; and when we
+remember that each one of these is the starting point of a new plant, it
+reminds us forcibly of the wholesale destruction of spores and seeds
+which must go on in nature, otherwise the mushrooms and their companions
+would soon cover every inch of the whole world.
+
+"As it is, they are spread abroad by the wind, and wherever they escape
+destruction they lie waiting in every nook and corner till, after the
+hot summer, showers of rain hasten the decay of plants and leaves, and
+then the mushrooms, toadstools, and puffballs, grow at an astounding
+pace. If you go into the woods at this season you may see the enormous
+deep-red liver fungus (_Fistulina hepatica_) growing on the oak-trees,
+in patches which weigh from twenty to thirty pounds; or the glorious
+orange-coloured fungus (_Tremella mesenterica_) growing on bare sticks
+or stumps of furze; or among dead leaves you may easily chance on the
+little caps of the crimson, scarlet, snowy white, or orange-coloured
+fungi which grow in almost every wood. From white to yellow, yellow to
+red, red to crimson and purple black, there is hardly any colour you may
+not find among this gaily-decked tribe; and who can wonder that the
+small bright-coloured caps have been supposed to cover tiny imps or
+elves, who used the large mushrooms to serve for their stools and
+tables?
+
+"There they work, thrusting their tubes into twigs and dead branches,
+rotting trunks and decaying leaves, breaking up the hard wood and tough
+fibres, and building them up into delicate cells, which by and by die
+and leave their remains as food for the early growing plants in the
+spring. So we see that in their way the mushrooms and toadstools are
+good imps after all, for the tender shoot of a young seedling plant
+could take no food out of a hard tree-trunk, but it finds the work done
+for it by the fungus, the rich nourishment being spread around its young
+roots ready to be imbibed.
+
+"To find our fairy-ring mushrooms, however, we must leave the wood and
+go out into the open country, especially on the downs and moors and
+rough meadows, where the land is poor and the grass coarse and spare.
+There grow the nourishing kinds, most of which we can eat, and among
+these is the delicate little champignon or 'Scotch-bonnet' mushroom,
+_Marasmius Oreades_,[1] which makes the fairy-rings. When a spore of
+this mushroom begins to grow, it sucks up vegetable food out of the
+earth and spreads its tubes underground, in all directions from the
+centre, so that the mycelium forms a round patch like a thick
+underground circular cobweb. In the summer and autumn, when the weather
+is suitable, it sends up its delicate pale-brown caps, which we may
+gather and eat without stopping the growth of the plant.
+
+ [1] Shown in initial letter of this chapter.
+
+"This goes on year after year underground, new tubes always travelling
+outwards till the circle widens and widens like the rings of water on a
+pond, only that it spreads very slowly, making a new ring each year,
+which is often composed of a mass of tubes as much as a foot thick in
+the ground, and the tender tubes in the centre die away as the new ones
+form a larger hoop outside.
+
+"But all this is below ground; where then are our fairy rings? Here is
+the secret. The tubes, as we have seen, take up food from the earth and
+build it up into delicate cells, which decay very soon, and as they die
+make a rich manure at the roots of the grass. So each season the cells
+of last year's ring make a rich feeding-ground for the young grass,
+which springs up fresh and green in a fairy ring, while _outside_ this
+emerald circle the mushroom tubes are still growing and increasing
+underneath the grass, so that next year, when the present ring is no
+longer richly fed, and has become faded and brown like the rest of the
+moor, another ring will spring up outside it, feeding on the prepared
+food below."
+
+"In bad seasons, though the tubes go on spreading and growing below, the
+mushroom fruit does not always appear above ground. The plant will only
+fruit freely when the ground has been well warmed by the summer sun,
+followed by damp weather to moisten it. This gives us a rich crop of
+mushrooms all over the country, and it is then you can best see the ring
+of fairy mushrooms circling outside the green hoop of fresh grass. In
+any case the early morning is the time to find them; it is only in very
+sheltered spots that they sometimes last through the day, or come up
+towards evening, as I found them last night on the warm damp side of the
+dell.
+
+"This is the true history of fairy rings, and now go and look for
+yourselves under the microscopes. Under the first three you will find
+the three different kinds of mould of our diagram (Fig. 22). Under the
+fourth the spores of the mould are shown in their first growth putting
+out the tubes to form the mycelium. The fifth shows the mould itself
+with its fruit-bearing tubes, one of which is bursting. Under the sixth
+the yeast plant is growing; the seventh shows a slice of one of the
+folds of the common mushroom with its spore-bearing horns; and under the
+eighth I have put some spores from different mushrooms, that you may see
+what curious shapes they assume.
+
+"Lastly, let me remind you, now that the autumn and winter are coming,
+that you will find mushrooms, toadstools, puffballs, and moulds in
+plenty wherever you go. Learn to know them, their different shapes and
+colours, and above all the special nooks each one chooses for its home.
+Look around in the fields and woods and take note of the decaying plants
+and trees, leaves and bark, insects and dead remains of all kinds. Upon
+each of these you will find some fungus growing, breaking up their
+tissues and devouring the nourishing food they provide. Watch these
+spots, and note the soft spongy soil which will collect there, and then
+when the spring comes, notice what tender plants flourish upon these
+rich feeding grounds. You will thus see for yourselves that the fungi,
+though they feed upon others, are not entirely mischief-workers, but
+also perform their part in the general work of life."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+THE LIFE-HISTORY OF LICHENS AND MOSSES
+
+
+[Illustration]
+
+The autumn has passed away and we are in the midst of winter. In the
+long winter evenings the stars shine bright and clear, and tempt us to
+work with the telescope and its helpmates the spectroscope and
+photographic plates. But at first sight it would seem as though our
+microscopes would have to stand idle so far at least as plants are
+concerned, or be used only to examine dried specimens and mounted
+sections. Yet this is not the fact, as I remembered last week when
+walking through the bare and leafless wood. A startled pheasant rising
+with a whirr at the sound of my footsteps among the dead leaves roused
+me from my thoughts, and as a young rabbit scudded across the path and I
+watched it disappear among the bushes, I was suddenly struck with the
+great mass of plant life flourishing underfoot and overhead.
+
+Can you guess what plants these were? I do not mean the evergreen pines
+and firs, nor the few hardy ferns, nor the lovely ivy clothing the
+trunks of the trees. Such plants as these live and remain green in the
+winter, but they do not grow. If you wish to find plant life revelling
+in the cold damp days of winter, fearing neither frost nor snow and
+welcoming mist and rain, you must go to the mosses, which as autumn
+passes away begin to cover the wood-paths, to creep over the roots of
+the trees, to suck up the water in the bogs, and even to clothe dead
+walls and stones with a soft green carpet. And with the mosses come the
+lichens, those curious grey and greenish oddities which no one but a
+botanist would think of classing among plants.
+
+The wood is full of them now: the hairy lichens hang from the branches
+of many of the trees, making them look like old greybearded men; the
+leafy lichens encircle the branches, their pale gray, green, and yellow
+patches looking as if they were made of crumpled paper cut into wavy
+plates; and the crusty lichens, scarcely distinguishable from the bark
+of the trees, cover every available space which the mosses have left
+free.
+
+As I looked at these lichens and thought of their curious history I
+determined that we would study them to-day, and gathered a basketful of
+specimens (see Fig. 28). But when I had collected these I found I had
+not the heart to leave the mosses behind. I could not even break off a
+piece of bark with lichen upon it without some little moss coming too,
+especially the small thread-mosses (_Bryum_) which make a home for
+themselves in every nook and corner of the branches; while the
+feather-mosses, hair-mosses, cord-mosses, and many others made such a
+lovely carpet under my feet that each seemed too beautiful to pass by,
+and they found their way into my basket, crowned at the top with a large
+mass of the pale-green Sphagnum, or bog-moss, into which I sank more
+than ankle-deep as I crossed the bog in the centre of the wood on my way
+home.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 28.
+
+Examples of Lichens. (From life.)
+
+1, A hairy lichen. 2, A leafy lichen. 3, A crustaceous lichen. _f_, _f_,
+the fruit.]
+
+So here they all are, and I hope by the help of our magic glass to let
+you into some of the secrets of their lives. It is true we must study
+the structure of lichens chiefly by diagrams, for it is too minute for
+beginners to follow under the microscope, so we must trust to drawings
+made by men more skilful in microscopic botany, at any rate for the
+present. But the mosses we can examine for ourselves and admire their
+delicate leaves and wonderful tiny spore-cases.
+
+Now the first question which I hope you want to ask is, how it is that
+these lowly plants flourish so well in the depth of winter when their
+larger and stronger companions die down to the ground. We will answer
+this first as to the lichens, which are such strange uncanny-looking
+plants that it is almost difficult to imagine they are alive at all; and
+indeed they have been a great puzzle to botanists.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 29.
+
+Single-celled green plants growing and dividing (_Pleurococcus_). (After
+Thuret and Bornet.)]
+
+Before we examine them, however, look for a minute at a small drop of
+this greenish film which I have taken from the rain-water taken outside.
+I have put some under each microscope, and those who can look into them
+will see the slide almost covered with small round green cells very much
+like the yeast cells we saw when studying the Fungi, only that instead
+of being colourless they are a bright green. Some of these cells will I
+suspect be longer than others, and these long cells will be moving over
+the slide very rapidly, swimming hither and thither, and you will see,
+perhaps for the first time, that very low plants can swim about in
+water. These green cells are, indeed, the simplest of all plants, and
+are merely bags of living matter which, by the help of the green
+granules in them, are able to work up water and gases into nourishing
+food, and so to live, grow, and multiply.
+
+There are many kinds of these single-celled plants in the world. You may
+find them on damp paths, in almost any rain-water butt, in ponds and
+ditches, in sparkling waterfalls, along the banks of flowing rivers, and
+in the cold clear springs on the bleak mountains. Some of them take the
+form of tangled threads[1] composed of long strings of cells, and these
+sometimes form long streamers in flowing water, and at other times are
+gathered together in a shapeless film only to be disentangled under a
+microscope. Other kinds[2] wave to and fro on the water, forming dense
+patches of violet, orange-brown, or glossy green scum shining in the
+bright sunlight, and these flourish equally in the ponds of our gardens
+and in pools in the Himalaya mountains, 18,000 feet above the sea.
+Others again[3] seize on every damp patch on tree trunks, rocks, or
+moist walls, covering them with a green powder formed of single plant
+cells. Other species of this family turn a bright red colour when the
+cells are still; and one, under the name of Gory Dew,[4] has often
+frightened the peasants of Italy, by growing very rapidly over damp
+walls and then turning the colour of blood. Another[5] forms the "red
+snow" of the Arctic regions, where it covers wide surfaces of snow with
+a deep red colour. Others[6] form a shiny jelly over rocks and stones,
+and these may be found almost everywhere, from the garden path to the
+warm springs of India, from the marshes of New Zealand up to the shores
+of the Arctic ocean, and even on the surface of floating icebergs.
+
+ [1] _Confervae._
+
+ [2] _Oscillariae._
+
+ [3] _Protococcus._
+
+ [4] _Palmella cruenta._
+
+ [5] _Protococcus nivalis._
+
+ [6] _Nostoc._
+
+The reason why these plants can live in such very different regions is
+that they do not take their food through roots out of the ground, but
+suck in water and gases through the thin membrane which covers their
+cell, and each cell does its own work. So it matters very little to them
+where they lie, so long as they have moisture and sunlight to help them
+in their work. Wherever they are, if they have these, they can take in
+carbonic acid from the air and work up the carbon with other gases which
+they imbibe with the water, and so make living material. In this way
+they grow, and as a cell grows larger the covering is stretched and part
+of the digested food goes to build up more covering membrane, and by and
+by the cell divides into two and each membrane closes up, so that there
+are two single-celled plants where there was only one before. This will
+sometimes go on so fast that a small pond may be covered in a few hours
+with a green film formed of new cells.
+
+Now we have seen, when studying mushrooms, that the one difference
+between these green plants and the single-celled Fungi is that while the
+green cells make their own food, colourless cells can only take it in
+ready-made, and therefore prey upon all kinds of living matter. This is
+just what happens in the lichens; and botanists have discovered that
+these curious growths are really the result of a _partnership_ between
+single-celled green plants and single-celled fungi. The grey part is a
+fungus; but when it is examined under the microscope we find it is not a
+fungus only; a number of green cells can be seen scattered through it,
+which, when carefully studied, prove to be some species of the green
+single-celled plants.
+
+Here are two drawings of sections cut through two different lichens, and
+enormously magnified so that the cells are clearly seen. 1, Fig. 30 is
+part of a hairy lichen (1, Fig. 28), and 2 is part of a leafy lichen (2,
+Fig. 28). The hairy lichen as you see has a row of green cells all round
+the tiny branch, with fungus cells on all sides of them. The leafy
+lichen, which only presents one surface to the sun and air while the
+other side is against the tree, has only one layer of green cells near
+the surface, but protected by the fungus above.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 30.
+
+Sections of Lichens. (Sachs.)
+
+1, Section of a hairy lichen, _Usnea barbata_. 2, Section of a leafy
+lichen, _Sticta fuliginosa_. 3, Early growth of a lichen. _gc_, Green
+cells. _f_, Fungus.]
+
+The way the lichen has grown is this. A green cell (_gc_ 3, Fig. 30)
+falling on some damp spot has begun to grow and spread, working up food
+in the sunlight. To it comes the spore of the fungus _f_, first
+thrusting its tubes into the tree-bark, or wall, and then spreading
+round the green cells, which remain always in such a position that
+sunlight, air, and moisture can reach them. From this time the two
+classes of plants live as friends, the fungus using part of the food
+made by the green cells, and giving them in return the advantage of
+being spread out to the sunlight, while they are also protected in
+frosty or sultry weather when they would dry up on a bare surface. On
+the whole, however, the fungus probably gains the most, for it has been
+found, as we should expect, that the green cells can live and grow if
+separated out of the lichen, but the fungus cells die when their
+industrious companions are taken from them.
+
+At any rate the partnership succeeds, as you will see if you go into the
+wood, or into an orchard where the apple-trees are neglected, for every
+inch of the branches is covered by lichens if not already taken up by
+mosses or toadstools.
+
+There is hardly any part of the world except the tropics where lichens
+do not abound. In the Alps of Scandinavia close to the limits of
+perpetual snow, in the sandy wastes of Arctic America, and over the
+dreary Tundras of Arctic Siberia, where the ground is frozen hard during
+the greater part of the year, they flourish where nothing else can live.
+
+The little green cells multiply by dividing, as we saw them doing in the
+green film from the water-butt. The fungus, however, has many different
+modes of seeding itself. One of these is by forming little pockets in
+the lichen, out of which, when they burst, small round bodies are
+thrown, which cover the lichen with a minute green powder. There is
+plenty of this powder on the leafy lichen which you have by you. You can
+see it with the magnifying-glass, without putting it under the
+microscope. As long as the lichen is dry these round bodies do not grow,
+but as soon as moisture reaches them they start away and become new
+plants.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 31.
+
+Fructification of a lichen. (From Sachs and Oliver.)
+
+Apothecium or spore-chamber of a lichen. 1, Closed. 2, Open. 3, The
+spore-cases and filaments enlarged, showing the spores. _f_, Filaments.
+_sc_, Spore-cases. _s_, Spores.]
+
+A more complicated and beautiful process is shown in this diagram (Fig.
+31). If you look carefully at the leafy lichen (2, Fig. 28) you will
+find here and there some little cups _f_, while others grow upon the
+tips of the hairy lichen. These cups, or fruits, were once closed,
+flask-shaped chambers (1, Fig. 31) inside which are formed a number of
+oval cells _sc_, which are spore-cases, with from four to eight spores
+or seed-like bodies _s3_ inside them. When these chambers, which are
+called _apothecia_, are ripe, moist or rainy weather causes them to
+swell at the top, and they burst open and the spore-cases throw out the
+spores to grow into new fungi.
+
+In some lichens the chambers remain closed and the spores escape through
+a hole in the top, and they are then called _perithecia_, while in
+others, as these which we have here, they open out into a cup-shape.
+
+This, then, is the curious history of lichens; the green cells and fungi
+flourishing together in the damp winter and bearing the hardest frost
+far better than the summer drought, so that they have their good time
+when most other plants are dead or asleep. Yet though some of them, such
+as the hairy lichens, almost disappear in the summer, they are by no
+means dead, for, like all these very low plants, they can bear being
+dried up for a long time, and then, when moisture visits them again,
+each green cell sets to work, and they revive. There is much more to be
+learnt about them, but this will be sufficient to make you feel an
+interest in their simple lives, and when you look for them in the wood
+you will be surprised to find how many different kinds there are, for it
+is most wonderful that such lowly plants should build up such an immense
+variety of curious and grotesque forms.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+And yet, when we turn to the mosses, I am half afraid they will soon
+attract you away from the dull grey lichens, for of all plant histories
+it appears to me that the history of the moss-plant is most fascinating.
+
+As this history is complicated by the moss having, as it were, two
+lives, you must give me your whole attention, and I will explain it
+first from diagrams, though you can see all the steps under the
+microscope.
+
+Take in your hands, in the first place, a piece of this green moss which
+I have brought. How thick it is, like a rich felted carpet! and yet, if
+you pull it apart carefully, you will find that each leafy stem is
+separate, and can be taken away from the others without breaking
+anything. In this dense moss each stem is single and clothed with leaves
+wrapped closely round it (see Fig. 33); in some mosses the stem is
+branched, and in others the leaves grow on side stalks, as in this
+feathery moss (Fig. 32). But in each case every stem is like a separate
+plant, with its own tuft of tender roots _r_.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 32.
+
+A stem of feathery moss. (From life.)
+
+_l_, Leaves. _s_, Stem. _r_, Roots.]
+
+What a delicate growth it is! The stem is scarcely more than a fine
+thread, the leaves minute, transparent, and tender. In this pale
+sphagnum or bog-moss (Fig. 36, p. 93), which is much larger and stouter,
+you can see better how each one of these leaves, though they are so
+thickly packed, is placed so that it can get the utmost light, air, and
+moisture. Yet so closely are the leaves of each stem entangled in those
+of the next that the whole forms a thick springy green carpet under our
+feet.
+
+How is it, then, that these moss stems, though each independent, grow in
+such a dense mass? Partly because moss multiplies so rapidly that new
+stems are always thrusting themselves up to the light, but chiefly
+because the stems were not always separate, but in very early life
+sprang from a common source.
+
+If, instead of bringing the moss home and tearing it apart, you went to
+a spot in the wood where fresh moss was growing, and looked very
+carefully on the surface of the ground or among the water of a marsh,
+you would find a spongy green mass below the growing moss, very much
+like the green scum on a pond. This film, some of which I have brought
+home, is seen under the microscope to be a mass of tangled green threads
+(_t_, Fig. 34, p. 88) like those of the _Confervae_ (see p. 79), composed
+of rows of cells, while here and there upon these threads you would find
+a bud (_mb_, Fig. 34) rising up into the air.
+
+This tangled mass of green threads, called the _protonema_, is the first
+growth, from which the moss stems spring. It has itself originated from
+a moss-spore; as we shall see by and by. As soon as it has started it
+grows and spreads very rapidly, drinking in water and air through all
+its cells and sending up the moss buds which swell and grow, giving out
+roots below and fine stems above, which soon become crowded with leaves,
+forming the velvety carpet we call moss. Meanwhile the soft threads
+below die away, giving up all their nourishment to the moss-stems, and
+this is why, when you take up the moss, you find each stem separate. But
+now comes the question, How does each stem live after the nourishing
+threads below have died? It is true each stem has a few hairy roots,
+but these are very feeble, and not at all like the roots of higher
+plants. The fact is, the moss is built up entirely of tender cells, like
+the green cells in the lichen, or in the film upon the pond. These cells
+are not shut in behind a thick skin as in the leaves of higher plants,
+but have every one of them the power to take in water and gases through
+their tender membrane.
+
+I made last night a rough drawing of the leaf of the feathery moss put
+under the microscope, but you will see it far better by putting a leaf
+with a little water on a glass slide under the covering glass and
+examining it for yourself. You will see that it is composed of a number
+of oval-shaped cells packed closely together (_c_ Fig. 33), with a few
+long narrow ones _mr_ in the middle of the leaf forming the midrib.
+Every cell is as clear and distinct as if it were floating in the water,
+and the tiny green grains which help it to work up its food are clearly
+visible.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 33.
+
+Moss-leaf magnified. (From life.)
+
+Showing the cells _c_, each of which can take in and work up its own
+food. _mr_, Long cells of the mid-rib.]
+
+Each of these cells can act as a separate plant, drinking in the water
+and air it needs, and feeding and growing quite independently of the
+roots below. Yet at the same time the moss stem has a great advantage
+over single-celled plants in having root-hairs, and being able to grow
+upright and expose its leaves to the sun and air.
+
+Now you will no longer wonder that moss grows so fast and so thick, and
+another curious fact follows from the independence of each cell, namely,
+that new growths can start from almost any part of the plant. For
+example, pieces will often break off from the tangled mass or protonema
+below, and, starting on their own account, form other thread masses.
+Then, after the moss stems have grown, a new mass of threads may grow
+from one of the tiny root-hairs of a stem and make a fresh tangle; nay,
+a thread will sometimes even spring out of a damp moss leaf and make a
+new beginning, while the moss stems themselves often put forth buds and
+branches, which grow root-hairs and settle down on their own account.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 34.
+
+Polytrichum commune. A large hair-moss.
+
+_t_, _t_, Threads of green cells forming the _protonema_ out of which
+moss-buds spring. _mb_, Buds of moss-stems. _a_, Minute green flower in
+which the antherozoids are formed (enlarged in Fig. 35). _p_, _p1_,
+_p2_, _p3_, Minute green flower in which the ovules are formed, and
+urn-plant springing out of it (enlarged in Fig. 35). _us_, Urn stems.
+_c_, Cap. _u_, Urn after cap has fallen off, still protected by its
+lid.]
+
+All this comes from the simple nature of the plants, each cell doing its
+own work. Nor are the mosses in any difficulty as to soil, for as the
+matted threads decay they form a rich manure, and the dying moss-stems
+themselves, being so fragile, turn back very readily into food. This is
+why mosses can spread over the poorest soil where even tough grasses
+cannot live, and clothe walls and roofs with a rich green.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 35.
+
+Fructification of a moss.
+
+A, Male moss-flower stripped of its outer leaves, showing jointed
+filaments and oval sacs os and antherozoid cells _zc_ swarming out of a
+sac. _zc'_, Antherozoid cell enlarged. _z_, Free antherozoid. P, Female
+flower with bottle-shaped sacs _bs_. _bs-c_, Bottle-shaped sac, with cap
+being pushed up. _u_, Urn of _Funaria hygrometrica_, with small cap.
+_u'_, Urn, from which the cap has fallen, showing the teeth _t_ which
+keep in the spores.]
+
+So far, then, we now understand the growth of the mossy-leaf stems, but
+this is only half the life of the plant. After the moss has gone on
+through the damp winter spreading and growing, there appear in the
+spring or summer tiny moss flowers at the tip of some of the stems.
+These flowers (_a_, _p_, Fig. 34) are formed merely of a few green
+leaves shorter and stouter than the rest, enclosing some oval sacs
+surrounded by jointed hairs or filaments (see A and P, Fig. 35). These
+sacs are of two different kinds, one set being short and stout _os_, the
+others having long necks like bottles _bs_. Sometimes these two kinds of
+sac are in one flower, but more often they are in separate flowers, as
+in the hair-moss, _Polytrichum commune_ (_a_ and _p_, Fig. 34). Now when
+the flowers are ripe the short sacs in the flower A open and fling out
+myriads of cells _zc_, and these cells burst, and forth come tiny
+wriggling bodies _z_, called by botanists _antherozoids_, one out of
+each cell. These find their way along the damp moss to the flower P, and
+entering the neck of one of the bottle-shaped sacs _bs_, find out each
+another cell or _ovule_ inside. The two cells together then form a
+_plant-egg_, which answers to the germ in the seeds of higher plants.
+
+Now let us be sure we understand where we are in the life of the plant.
+We have had its green-growing time, its flowering, and the formation of
+what we may roughly call its seed, which last in ordinary higher plants
+would fall down and grow into a new green plant. But with the moss there
+is more to come. The egg does not shake out of the bottle-necked sac,
+but begins to grow inside it, sending down a little tube into the moss
+stem, and using it as other plants use the ground to grow in.
+
+As soon as it is rooted it begins to form a delicate stem, and as this
+grows it pushes up the sac _bs_, stretching the neck tighter and tighter
+till at last it tears away below, and the sac is carried up and hangs
+like an extinguisher or cap (_c_ Figs. 34, 35) over the top of the stem.
+Meanwhile, under this cap the top of the stalk swells into a knob
+which, by degrees, becomes a lovely little covered urn _u_, something
+like a poppy head, which has within it a number of spores. The growth of
+this tiny urn-plant often occupies several months, for you must remember
+that it is not merely a fruit, though it is often called so, but a real
+plant, taking in food through its tubes below and working for its
+living.
+
+When it is finished it is a most lovely little object (_us_, Fig. 34),
+the fine hairlike stalk being covered with a green, yellow, or brilliant
+red fool's cap on the top, yet the whole in most mosses is not bigger
+than an ordinary pin. You may easily see them in the spring or summer,
+or even sometimes in the winter. I have only been able to bring you one
+very little one to-day, the _Funaria hygrometrica_, which fruits early
+in the year. This moss has only a short cap, but in many mosses they are
+very conspicuous. I have often pulled them off as you would pull a cap
+from a boy's head. In nature they fall off after a time, leaving the
+urn, which, though so small, is a most complicated structure. First it
+has an outer skin, with holes or mouths in it which open and close to
+let moisture in and out. Then come two layers of cells, then an open
+space full of air, in which are the green chlorophyll grains which are
+working up food for the tiny plant as the moisture comes in to them.
+Lastly, within this again is a mass of tissue, round which grow the
+spores which are soon to be sown, and which in _Polytrichum commune_ are
+protected by a lid. Even after the extinguisher and the lid have both
+fallen off, the spores cannot fall out, for a thick row of teeth (_t_,
+Fig. 35) is closed over them like the tentacles of an anemone. So long
+as the air is damp these teeth remain closed; it is only in fine dry
+weather that they open and the spores are scattered on the ground.
+_Funaria hygrometrica_ has no lid under its cap, and after the cap falls
+the spores are only protected by the teeth.
+
+When the spores are gone, the life of the tiny urn-plant is over. It
+shrivels and dies, leaving ten, fifteen, or even more spores, which,
+after lying for some time on the ground, sprout and grow into a fresh
+mass of soft threads.
+
+So now we have completed the life-history of the moss and come back to
+the point at which we started. I am afraid it has been rather a
+difficult history to follow step by step, and yet it is perfectly clear
+when once we master the succession of growths. Starting from a spore,
+the thread-mass or protonema gives rise to the moss-stems forming the
+dense green carpet, then the green flowers on some of the leaf-stems
+give rise to a plant-egg, which roots itself in the stem, and grows into
+a perfect plant without leaves, bearing merely the urn in which fresh
+spores are formed, and so the round goes on from year to year.
+
+There are a great number of different varieties of moss, and they differ
+in the shape and arrangement of their stems and leaves, and very much in
+the formation of their urns, yet this sketch will enable you to study
+them with understanding, and when you find in the wood the nodding caps
+of the fruiting plants, some red, some green, some yellow, and some a
+brilliant orange, you will feel that they are acquaintances, and by the
+help of the microscope may soon become friends.
+
+Among them one of the most interesting is the sphagnum or bog-moss (Fig.
+36), which spreads its thick carpet over all the bogs in the woods. You
+cannot miss its little orange-coloured spore-cases if you look closely,
+for they contrast strongly with its pale green leaves, out of which they
+stand on very short stalks. I wish we could examine it, for it differs
+much from other mosses, both in leaves and fruit, but it would take us
+too long. At least, however, you must put one of its lovely transparent
+leaves under the microscope, that you may see the large air-cells which
+lie between the growing cells, and admire the lovely glistening bands
+which run across and across their covering membrane, for the sphagnum
+leaf is so extremely beautiful that you will never forget it when once
+seen. It is through these large cells in the edge of the stem and leaf
+that the water rises up from the swamp, so that the whole moss is like a
+wet sponge.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 36.
+
+Sphagnum moss from a Devonshire bog. (From life.)]
+
+And now, before we part, we had better sum up the history of lichens and
+mosses. With the lichens we have seen that the secret of success seems
+to be mutual help. The green cells provide the food, the fungus cells
+form a surface over which the green cells can spread to find sunlight
+and moisture, and protection from extremes of heat or cold. With the
+mosses the secret lies in their standing on the borderland between two
+classes of plant life. On the one hand, they are still tender-celled
+plants, each cell being able to live its own life and make its own food;
+on the other hand, they have risen into shapely plants with the
+beginnings of feeble roots, and having stems along which their leaves
+are arranged so that they are spread to the light and air. Both lichens
+and mosses keep one great advantage common to all tender-celled plants;
+they can be dried up so that you would think them dead, and yet, because
+they can work all over their surface whenever heat and moisture reach
+them, each cell drinks in food again and the plant revives. So when a
+scorching sun, or a dry season, or a biting frost kills other plants,
+the mosses and lichens bide their time till moisture comes again.
+
+In our own country they grow almost everywhere--on walls, on broken
+ground, on sand-heaps, on roofs and walls, on trees living and dead, and
+over all pastures which are allowed to grow poor and worn out. They
+grow, too, in all damp, marshy spots; especially the bog-mosses forming
+the peat-bogs which cover a large part of Ireland and many regions in
+Scotland; and these same bog-mosses occur in America, New Zealand, and
+Australia.
+
+In the tropics mosses are less abundant, probably because other plants
+flourish so luxuriantly; but in Arctic Siberia and Arctic America both
+lichens and mosses live on the vast Tundras. There, during the three
+short months of summer, when the surface of the ground is soft, the
+lichens spread far and wide where all else is lifeless, while in moister
+parts the Polytrichums or hair-mosses cover the ground, and in swampy
+regions stunted Sphagnums form peat-bogs only a few inches in depth over
+the frozen soil beneath. If, then, the lichens and mosses can flourish
+even in such dreary latitudes as these, we can understand how they defy
+even our coldest winters, appearing fresh and green when the snow melts
+away from over them, and leave their cells bathed in water, so that
+these lowly plants clothe the wood with their beauty when otherwise all
+would be bare and lifeless.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+THE HISTORY OF A LAVA STREAM
+
+
+[Illustration]
+
+It is now just twenty-two years ago, boys, since I saw a wonderful
+sight, which is still so fresh in my mind that I have to look round and
+remember that it was before any of you were born, in order to persuade
+myself that it can be nearly a quarter of a century since I stood with
+my feet close to a flowing stream of red-hot lava.
+
+It happened in this way. I was spending the winter with friends in
+Naples, and we were walking quietly one lovely afternoon in November
+along the Villa Reale, the public garden on the sea-shore, when one of
+our party exclaimed, "Look at Vesuvius!" We did so, and saw in the
+bright sunlight a dense dark cloud rising up out of the cone. The
+mountain had been sending out puffs of smoke, with a booming noise, for
+several days, but we thought nothing of that, for it had been common
+enough for slight eruptions to take place at intervals ever since the
+great eruption of 1867. This cloud, however, was far larger and
+wider-spread than usual, and as we were looking at it we saw a thin red
+line begin some way down the side of the mountain and creep onwards
+toward the valley which lies behind the Hermitage near where the
+Observatory is built (see Fig. 37). "A crater has broken out on the
+slope," said our host; "it will be a grand sight to-night. Shall we go
+up and see it?" No sooner proposed than settled, and one of the party
+started off at once to secure horses and men before others engaged them.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 37.
+
+Somma. Vesuvius.
+
+Vesuvius, as seen in eruption by the author, November 1868.]
+
+It was about eight o'clock in the evening when we started in a carriage
+for Resina, and alighting there, with buried Herculaneum under our feet,
+mounted our horses and set forward with the guides. Then followed a long
+ascent of about two hours and a half through the dark night. Silently
+and carefully we travelled on over the broad masses of slaggy lava of
+former years, along which a narrow horse-path had been worn; and ever
+and anon we heard the distant booming in the crater at the summit, and
+caught sight of fresh gleams of light as we took some turning which
+brought the glowing peak into view.
+
+Our object was to get as close as possible to the newly-opened crater in
+the mountain-side, and when we arrived on a small rugged plain not far
+from the spot, we alighted from our horses, which were growing
+frightened with the glare, and walked some distance on foot till we came
+to a ridge running down the slope, and upon this ridge the lava stream
+was flowing.
+
+Above our heads hung a vast cloud of vapour which reflected the bright
+light from the red-hot stream, and threw a pink glow all around, so
+that, where the cloud was broken and we could see the dark sky, the
+stars looked white as silver in contrast. We could now trace clearly the
+outline of the summit towering above us, and even watch the showers of
+ashes and dust which burst forth from time to time, falling back into
+the crater, or on to the steep slopes of the cone.
+
+If the night had not been calm, and such a breeze as there was blowing
+away from us, our position would scarcely have been safe; and indeed we
+were afterwards told we had been rash. But I would have faced even a
+greater risk to see so grand a spectacle, and when the guide helped me
+to scramble up on to the ledge, so that I stood with my feet within a
+few yards of the lava flow, my heart bounded with excitement. I could
+not stay more than a few seconds, for the gases and vapour choked me;
+but for that short time it felt like a dream to be standing close to a
+river of molten rock, which a few hours before had been lying deep in
+the bowels of the earth. Glancing upwards to where this river issued
+from the cone in the mountain-side, I saw it first white-hot, then
+gradually fading to a glowing red as it crept past my feet; and then
+looking down the slope I saw it turn black and gloomy as it cooled
+rapidly at the top, while through the cracks which opened here and there
+as it moved on, puffs of gas and vapour rose into the air, and the red
+lava beneath gleamed through the chinks.
+
+We did not stay long, for the air was suffocating, but took our way back
+to the Hermitage, where another glorious sight awaited us. Some way
+above and behind the hill on which the Observatory stands there is, or
+was, a steep cliff, and over this the lava stream, now densely black,
+fell in its way to the valley below, and as it fell it broke into huge
+masses, which heeling over exposed the red-hot lava under the crust,
+thus forming a magnificent fiery cascade in which black and red were
+mingled in wild confusion.
+
+This is how I saw a fresh red-hot lava stream. I had ascended the
+mountain some years before, when it was comparatively quiet, with only
+two small cones in its central crater sending out miniature flows of
+lava (see Fig. 38). But the crater was too hot for me to cross over to
+these cones, and I could only marvel at the mass of ashes of which the
+top of the mountain was composed, and plunge a stick into an old lava
+stream to see how hot it still remained below. Peaceful and quiet as the
+mountain seemed then, I could never have imagined such a glorious
+outburst as that of November 1868 unless I had seen it, and yet this was
+quite a small eruption compared to those of 1867 and 1872, which in
+their turn were nothing to some of the older eruptions in earlier
+centuries.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 38.
+
+The top of Vesuvius in 1864. (After Nasmyth.)]
+
+Now it is the history of this lava stream which I saw, that we are going
+to consider to-day, and you will first want to know where it came from,
+and what caused it to break out on the mountain-side. The truth is, that
+though we know now a good deal about volcanoes themselves, we know very
+little about the mighty cauldrons deep down in the earth from which
+they come. Our deepest mines only reach to a depth of a little more than
+half a mile, and no borings even have been made beyond three-quarters of
+a mile, so that after this depth we are left very much to guesswork.
+
+We do know that the temperature increases as we go farther down from the
+surface, but the increase is very different in different districts--in
+some places being five times greater than it is in others at an equal
+depth, and it is always greatest in localities where volcanoes have been
+active not long before. Now if there were an ocean of melted rock at a
+certain distance down below the crust all over the globe, there could
+scarcely be such a great difference between one place and another, and
+for this and many other reasons geologists are inclined to think that,
+from some unknown cause, great heat is developed at special points below
+the surface at different times. This would account for our finding
+volcanic rocks in almost all parts of the world, even very far away from
+where there are any active volcanoes now.
+
+But, as I have said, we do not clearly know why great reservoirs of
+melted rock occur from time to time deep under our feet. We may perhaps
+one day find the clue from the fact that nearly all, if not all,
+volcanoes occur near to the water's edge, either on the coast of the
+great oceans or of some enormous inland sea or lake. But at present all
+we can say is, that in certain parts of the globe there must be from
+time to time great masses of rock heated till they are white-hot, and
+having white-hot water mingled with them. These great masses need not,
+however, be liquid, for we know that under enormous pressure white-hot
+metals remain solid, and water instead of flashing into steam is kept
+liquid, pressing with tremendous force upon whatever keeps it confined.
+
+But now suppose that for some reason the mass of solid rock and ground
+above one of these heated spots should crack and become weak, or that
+the pressure from below should become so great as to be more powerful
+than the weight above, then the white-hot rock and water quivering and
+panting to expand, would upheave and burst the walls of their prison.
+Cannot you picture to yourselves how when this happened the rock would
+swell into a liquid state, and how the water would force its way upwards
+into cracks and fissures expanding into steam as it went. Then would be
+heard strange rumbling noises underground, as all these heavily
+oppressed white-hot substances upheaved and rent the crust above them.
+And after a time the country round, or the ground at the bottom of the
+sea, would quake and tremble, till by and by a way out would be found,
+and the water flashing into vapour would break and fling up the masses
+of rock immediately above the passage it had made for itself, and
+following after these would come the molten rock pouring out at the new
+opening.
+
+Such outbursts as these have been seen at sea many times near volcanic
+islands. In 1811 a new island called Sabrina was thrown up off St.
+Michael's in the Azores, and after remaining a short time was washed
+away by the waves. In the same way Graham's Island appeared off the
+coast of Sicily in 1831, and as late as 1885 Mr. Shipley saw a
+magnificent eruption in the Pacific near the Tonga Islands when an
+island about three miles long was formed.
+
+Another very extraordinary outburst, this time on land, took place in
+1538 on the opposite side of the Bay of Naples to where Vesuvius stands.
+There, on the shores of the Bay of Baiae, a mountain 440 feet high was
+built up in one week, where all had before been quiet in the memory of
+man. For two years before the outburst came, rumblings and earthquakes
+had alarmed the people, and at last one day the sea drew back from the
+shore and the ground sank about fourteen feet, and then on the night of
+Sunday, September 29, 1538, it was hurled up again, and steam, fiery
+gases, stones, and mud burst forth, driving away the frightened people
+from the village of Puzzuoli about two miles distant. For a whole week
+jets of lava, fragments of rock, and showers of ashes were poured out,
+till they formed the hill now called Monte Nuovo, 440 feet high and
+measuring a mile and a half round the base. And there it has remained
+till the present day, perfectly quiet after the one great outburst had
+calmed down, and is now covered with thickets of stone-pine trees.
+
+These sudden outbursts show that some great change must occur in the
+state of the earth's crust under the spots where they take place, and we
+know that eruptions may cease for centuries in any particular place and
+then begin afresh quite unexpectedly. Vesuvius was a peaceable mountain
+overgrown with trees and vines in the time of the Greeks till in the
+year A.D. 79 occurred the terrific outburst which destroyed Herculaneum
+and Pompeii, shattering old Vesuvius to pieces, so that only the cliffs
+on the northwest remain and are called Somma (see Fig. 37), while the
+new Vesuvius has grown up in the lap, as it were, of its old self. Yet
+when we visit the cliffs of Somma, and examine the old lava streams in
+them, we see that the ancient peaceful mountain was itself built up by
+volcanic outbursts of molten rock, and showers of clinkers or scoriae,
+long before man lived to record it.
+
+Meanwhile, when once an opening is made, we can understand how after an
+eruption is over, and the steam and lava are exhausted, all quiets down
+for awhile, and the melted rock in the crater of the mountain cools and
+hardens, shutting in once more the seething mass below. This was the
+state of the crater when I saw it in 1864, though small streams still
+flowed out of two minute cones; but since then at least one great
+outburst had taken place in 1867, and now on this November night, 1868,
+the imprisoned gases rebelled once more and forced their way through the
+mountain-side.
+
+At this point we can leave off forming conjectures and really study what
+happens; for we do know a great deal about the structure of volcanoes
+themselves, and the history of a lava-flow has been made very clear
+during the last few years, chiefly by the help of the microscope and
+chemical experiments. If we imagine then that on the day of the eruption
+we could have seen the inside of the mountain, the diagram (Fig. 39)
+will fairly represent what was taking place there.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 39.
+
+Diagrammatic section of an active volcano.
+
+_a_, Central pipe or funnel. _b_, _b_, Walls of the crater or cup.
+_c_, _c_, Dark turbid cloud formed by the ascending globular clouds
+_d_, _d_. _e_, Rain-shower from escaped vapour. _f_, _f_, Shower of
+blocks, cooled bombs, stones, and ashes falling back on to the cone.
+_g_, Lava escaping through a fissure, and pouring out of a cone opened
+in the mountain side.]
+
+In the funnel _a_ which passes down from the crater or cup _b_, _b_,
+white-hot lava was surging up, having a large quantity of water and
+steam entangled in it. The lava, or melted rock, would be in much the
+same state as melted iron-slag is, in the huge blast-furnaces in which
+iron-rock is fused, only it would have floating in it great blocks of
+solid rock, and rounded stones called bombs which have been formed from
+pieces of half-melted rock whirled in air and falling back into the
+crater, together with clinkers or scoriae, dust and sand, all torn off
+and ground down from the walls of the funnel up which the rush was
+coming. And in the pipe of melted rock, forcing the lava upwards,
+enormous bubbles of steam and gas _d_, _d_ would be rising up one after
+another as bubbles rise in any thick boiling substances, such as boiling
+sugar or tar.
+
+In the morning before the eruption, when only a little smoke was issuing
+from the crater, these bubbles rose very slowly through the loaded
+funnel and the half-cooled lava in the basin, and the booming noise,
+like that of heavy cannon, heard from time to time, was caused by the
+bursting of one of these globes of steam at the top of the funnel, as it
+brought up with it a feeble shower of stones, dust, and scoriae.
+Meanwhile the lava surging below was forcing a passage _g_ for itself in
+a weak part of the mountain-side and, just at the time when our
+attention was called to Vesuvius, the violent pressure from below rent
+open a mouth or crater at _h_, so that the lava began to flow down the
+mountain in a steady stream. This, relieving the funnel, enabled the
+huge steam bubbles _d_, _d_ to rise more quickly, and to form the large
+whitish-grey cloud _c_, into which from time to time the red-hot blocks,
+scoriae, and pumice were thrown up by the escaping steam and gases. These
+blocks and fragments then fell back again in a fiery shower _f_, _f_
+either into the cup, to be thrown up again by the bursting of the next
+bubble, or on to the sides of the cone, making it both broader and
+higher.
+
+Only one feature in the diagram was fortunately absent the evening we
+went up, namely, the rain-shower _e_. The night, as I said, was calm,
+and the air dry, and the steam floated peacefully away. The next night,
+however, when many people hurried down from Rome to see the sight they
+were woefully disappointed, for rain-showers fell heavily from the
+cloud, bringing down with them the dust and ashes, which covered the
+unfortunate sight-seers.
+
+This was what happened during the eruption, and the result after a few
+days was that the cone was a little higher, with a fresh layer of rough
+slaggy scoriae on its slopes, and that on the side of the mountain behind
+the Hermitage a new lava stream was added to the many which have flowed
+there of late years. What then can we learn from this stream about the
+materials which come up out of the depths of the earth, and of the
+manner in which volcanic rocks are formed?
+
+The lava as I saw it when coming first out of the newly-opened crater
+is, as I have said, like white-hot iron slag, but very soon the top
+becomes black and solid, a hard cindery mass full of holes and cavities
+with rough edges, caused by the steam and sulphur and other gases
+breaking through it.[1] In fact, there are so many holes and bubbles in
+it that it is very light and floats on the top of the heavier lava
+below, falling over it on to the mountain-side when it comes to the end
+of the stream. Still, however, the great mass moves on, so that the
+stream slides over these fallen clinkers or scoriae. Thus after an
+eruption a new flow consists of three layers; at the top the cooled and
+broken crust of clinkers, then the more solid lava, which often remains
+hot for years, and lastly another cindery layer beneath, formed of the
+scoriae which have fallen from above (see Fig. 40).
+
+ [1] For the cindery nature of the surface of such a stream see the
+ initial letter of this chapter.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 40.
+
+Section of a lava-flow. (J. Geikie.)
+
+1, Slaggy crust, formed chiefly of scoriae of a glassy nature. 2, Middle
+portion where crystals form. 3, Slaggy crust which has slipped down and
+been covered by the flow.]
+
+You would be surprised to see how quickly the top hardens, so that you
+can actually walk across a stream of lava a day or two after it comes
+out from the mountain. But you must not stand still or your shoes would
+soon be burnt, and if you break the crust with a stick you will at once
+see the red-hot lava below; while after a few days the cavities become
+filled with crystals of common salt, sulphur or soda, as the vapour and
+gases escape.
+
+Then as time goes on the harder minerals gradually crystallise out of
+the melted mass, and iron-pyrites, copper-sulphate, and numerous other
+forms of crystal appear in the lower part of the stream. In the clinkers
+above, where the cooling goes on very rapidly, the lavas formed are
+semi-transparent and look much like common bottle-glass. In fact, if you
+take this piece of obsidian or volcanic glass in your hand, you might
+think that it had come out of an ordinary glass manufactory and had
+nothing remarkable in it.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 41.
+
+A slice of volcanic glass showing the lines of crystallites and
+microliths which are the beginnings of crystals.[1] (J. Geikie.)]
+
+ [1] This arrangement in lines is called _fluidal structure_ in lava.
+
+But the microscope tells another tale. I have put a thin slice under the
+first microscope, and this diagram (Fig. 41) shows what you will see.
+Nothing, you say, but a few black specks and some tiny dark rods. True,
+but these specks and rods are the first beginnings of crystals forming
+out of the ground-mass of glassy lava as it cools down. They are not
+real crystals, but the first step toward them, and by a careful
+examination of glassy lavas which have cooled at different rates, they
+have been seen under the microscope in all stages of growth, gradually
+building up different crystalline forms. When we remember how rapidly
+the top of many glassy lavas cool down we can understand that they have
+often only time to grow very small.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 42.
+
+A slice of volcanic glass under the microscope, showing well-developed
+microliths. (After Cohen.)]
+
+The smaller specks are called _crystallites_, the rods are called
+_microliths_.[1] Under the next microscope you can see the microliths
+much more distinctly (Fig. 42) and observe that they grow in very
+regular shapes.
+
+ [1] _Micros_, little; _lithos_, stone.
+
+Our first slice, however (Fig. 41), tells us something more of their
+history, for the fact that they are arranged in lines shows that they
+have grown while the lava was flowing and carrying them along in
+streams. You will notice that each one has its greatest length in the
+direction of the lines, just as pieces of stick are carried along
+lengthways in a river. In the second specimen (Fig. 42) the microliths
+are much larger and the stream has evidently not been flowing fast, for
+they lie in all directions.
+
+This is what we find in the upper part of the stream, but if we look at
+a piece of underlying lava we find that it is much more coarse-grained,
+and the magnifying-glass shows many crystals in it, as well as a number
+of microliths. For this lava, covered by the crust above, has remained
+very hot for a long time, and the crystals have had time to build
+themselves up out of the microliths and crystallites.
+
+Still there is much glassy groundwork even in these lavas. If we want to
+find really stony masses such as porphyry and granite made up entirely
+of crystals we must look inside the mountain where the molten rock is
+kept intensely hot for long periods, as for example in the fissure _g_,
+Fig. 39.
+
+Such fissures sometimes open out on the surface like the one I saw, and
+sometimes only penetrate part of the way through the hill; but in either
+case when the lava in them cools down, it forms solid walls called dykes
+which help to bind the loose materials of the mountain together. We
+cannot, of course, examine these in an active volcano, but there are
+many extinct volcanoes which have been worn and washed by the weather
+for centuries, so that we can see the inside. The dykes laid bare in the
+cliffs of Somma are old fissures filled with molten rock which has
+cooled down, and they show us many stony lavas; and Mr. Judd tells us of
+one beautiful example of a ruined volcano which composes the whole
+island of Mull in the Hebrides, where such dykes can be traced right
+back to a centre. This centre must once have been a mass of melted
+matter far down in the earth, and as you trace the dykes back deeper and
+deeper into it, the rocks grow more and more stony, till at last they
+are composed entirely of large crystals closely crowded together
+without any glassy matter between them. You know this crystalline
+structure well, for we have plenty of blocks of granite scattered about
+on Dartmoor, showing that at some time long ago molten matter must have
+been at work in the depths under Devonshire.
+
+We see then that we can trace the melted rock of volcanoes right
+back--from the surface of the lava stream which cools quickly at the
+top, hurrying the crystallites and microliths along with it--down
+through the volcano to the depths of the earth, where the perfect
+crystals form slowly and deliberately in the underground lakes of
+white-hot rock which are kept in a melted state at an intense heat.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 43.
+
+A piece of Dartmoor Granite, drawn from a specimen.]
+
+But I promised you that we would have no guesswork here, and you will
+perhaps ask how I can be certain what was going on in the depths when
+these crystals were formed. A few years ago I could not have answered
+you, but now chemists, and especially two eminent French chemists, MM.
+Fouque and Levy, have actually _made_ lavas and shown us how it is done
+in Nature.
+
+By using powerful furnaces and bellows they have succeeded in getting
+temperatures of all degrees, from a dazzling white heat down to a dull
+red, and to keep any temperature they like for a long time, so as to
+imitate the state of a mass of melted rock at different depths in the
+earth, and in this way they have actually _made_ lavas in their
+crucibles. For example, there is a certain whitish rock common in
+Vesuvius called _leucotephrite_,[1] which is made up chiefly of crystals
+of the minerals called leucite, Labrador felspar, and augite. This they
+proposed to make artificially, so they took proper quantities of silica,
+alumina, oxide of iron, lime, potash, and soda, and putting them in a
+crucible, melted them by keeping them at a white heat. Then they lowered
+the temperature to an orange-heat, that is a heat sufficient to melt
+steel. They kept this heat for forty-eight hours, after which they took
+out some of the mixture and, letting it cool, examined a slice under the
+microscope. Within it they found crystals of _leucite_ already formed,
+showing that these are the first to grow while the melted rock is still
+intensely hot. The rest of the mixture they kept red-hot, or at the
+melting-point of copper, for another forty-eight hours, and when they
+took it out and examined it they found that the whole of it had been
+transformed into microliths of the two other forms of crystals, Labrador
+felspar and augite, except some small eight-sided crystals of magnetite
+and picotite which are also found in the natural rock.
+
+ [1] _Leucos_, white; _tephra_, ashes.
+
+There is no need for you to remember all these names. What I do want you
+to remember is, that, at the different temperatures, the right crystals
+and beginnings of crystals grew up to form the rock which is found in
+Vesuvius. And what is still more interesting, they grew exactly to the
+same stages as in the natural rock, which is composed of _crystals_ of
+leucite and _microliths_ of the two other minerals.
+
+This is only one among numerous experiments by which we have learnt how
+volcanic rocks are formed and at what heat the crystals of different
+substances grow. We are only as yet at the beginning of this new study,
+and there is plenty for you boys to do by and by when you grow up. Many
+experiments have failed as yet to imitate certain rocks, and it is
+remarkable that these are usually rocks of very ancient eruptions, when
+_perhaps_ our globe may have been in a different state to what it is
+now; but this remains for us to find out.
+
+Meanwhile I have still another very interesting slide to show you which
+tells us something of what is going on below the volcano. Under the
+third microscope I have put a slice of volcanic glass (Fig. 44) in which
+you will see really large crystals with dark bands curving round them.
+These crystals have clearly not been formed in the glass while the lava
+was flowing, first because they are too large to have grown up so
+rapidly, and secondly because they are broken at the edges in places and
+sometimes partly melted. They have evidently come up with the lava as it
+flowed out of the mountain, and the dark bands curving round them are
+composed of microliths which have been formed in the flow and have swept
+round them, as floating straws gather round a block of wood in a stream.
+
+Such crystals as these are often found in lava streams, and in fact they
+make a great difference in the rate at which a stream flows, for a
+thoroughly melted lava shoots along at a great pace and often travels
+several miles in a very short time; but an imperfectly melted lava full
+of crystals creeps slowly along, and often does not travel far from the
+crater out of which it flows.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 44.
+
+Slice of volcanic glass under the microscope, showing large included
+crystals brought up from inside the volcano in the fluid lava. The dark
+bands are lines of microliths formed as the lava cooled. (J. Geikie.)]
+
+So you see we have proof in this slice of volcanic glass of two separate
+periods of crystallisation--the period when the large crystals grew in
+the liquid mass under the mountain, and the period when the microliths
+were formed after it was poured out above ground. And as we know that
+different substances form their crystals at very different temperatures,
+it is not surprising that some should be able to take up the material
+they require and grow in the underground lakes of melted matter, even
+though the rest of the lava was sufficiently fluid to be forced up out
+of the mountain.
+
+And here we must leave our lava stream. The microscope can tell us yet
+more, of marvellous tiny cavities inside the crystals, millions in a
+single inch, and of other crystals inside these, all of which have their
+history; but this would lead us too far. We must be content for the
+present with having roughly traced a flow of lava from the depths below,
+where large crystals form in subterranean darkness, to the open air
+above, where we catch the tiny beginnings of crystals hardened into
+glassy lava before they have time to grow further.
+
+If you will think a little for yourselves about these wonderful
+discoveries made with the magic-glass, you will see how many questions
+they suggest to us about the minerals which we find buried in the earth
+and running through it in veins, and you will want to know something
+about the more precious crystals, such as rubies, diamonds, sapphires,
+and garnets, and many others which Nature forms far away out of our
+sight. All these depend, though indirectly, upon the strange effects of
+underground heat, and if you have once formed a picture in your minds of
+what must have been going on before that magnificent lava stream crept
+down the mountain-side and added its small contribution to the surface
+of the earth, you will study eagerly all that comes in your way about
+crystals and minerals, and while you ask questions with the spectroscope
+about what is going on in the sun and stars millions of miles away, you
+will also ask the microscope what it has to tell of the work going on at
+depths many miles under your feet.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+AN HOUR WITH THE SUN
+
+
+[Illustration]
+
+Before beginning upon the subject of our lecture to-day I want to tell
+you the story of a great puzzle which presented itself to me when I was
+a very young child. I happened to come across a little book--I can see
+it now as though it were yesterday--a small square green book called
+_World without End_, which had upon the cover a little gilt picture of a
+stile with trees on each side of it. That was all. I do not know what
+the book was about, indeed I am almost sure I never opened it or saw it
+again, but that stile and the title "World without End" puzzled me
+terribly. What was on the other side of the stile? If I could cross over
+it and go on and on should I be in a world which had no ending, and what
+would be on the other side? But then there could be no other side if it
+was a world without any end. I was very young, you must remember, and I
+grew confused and bewildered as I imagined myself reaching onwards and
+onwards beyond that stile and never, never resting. At last I consulted
+my greatest friend, an old man who did the weeding in my father's
+garden, and whom I believed to be very wise. He looked at first almost
+as bewildered as I was, but at last light dawned upon him. "I tell you
+what it is, Master Arthur," said he, "I do not rightly know what happens
+when there is no end, but I do know that there is a mighty lot to be
+found out in this world, and I'm thinking we had better learn first all
+about that, and perhaps it may teach us something which will help us to
+understand the other."
+
+I daresay you will wonder what this anecdote can have to do with a
+lecture on the sun--I will tell you. Last night I stood on the balcony
+and looked out far and farther away into the star-depths of the midnight
+sky, marvelling what could be the history of those countless suns of
+which we see ever more and more as we increase the power of our
+telescopes, or catch the faint beams of those we cannot see and make
+them print their image on the photographic plate. And, as I grew
+oppressed at the thought of this never-ending expanse of suns and at my
+own littleness, I remembered all at once the little square book of my
+childish days with its gilt stile, and my old friend's advice to learn
+first all we can of that which lies nearest.
+
+So to-day, before we travel away to the stars, we had better inquire
+what is known about the one star in the heavens which is comparatively
+near to us, our own glorious sun, which sends us all our light and heat,
+causes all the movements of our atmosphere, draws up the moisture from
+the ground to return in refreshing rain, ripens our harvests, awakens
+the seeds and sleeping plants into vigorous growth, and in a word
+sustains all the energy and life upon our earth. Yet even this star,
+which is more than a million times as large as our earth, and bound so
+closely to us that a convulsion on its surface sends a thrill right
+through our atmosphere, is still so far off that it is only by
+questioning the sunbeams it sends to us, that we can know anything about
+it.
+
+You have already learnt[1] a good deal as to the size, the intense heat
+and light, and the photographic power of the sun, and also how his white
+beams of light are composed of countless coloured rays which we can
+separate in a prism. Now let us pass on to the more difficult problem of
+the nature of the sun itself, and what we know of the changes and
+commotions going on in that blazing globe of light.
+
+ [1] _Fairyland of Science_, Chapter II.
+
+We will try first what we can see for ourselves. If you take a card and
+make a pin-hole in it, you can look through this hole straight at the
+sun without injuring your eye, and you will see a round shining disc on
+which, perhaps, you may detect a few dark spots. Then if you take your
+hand telescopes, which I have shaded by putting a piece of smoked glass
+inside the eye-piece, you will find that this shining disc is really a
+round globe, and moreover, although the object-glass of your telescopes
+measures only two-and-a-half inches across, you will be able to see the
+dark spots very distinctly and to observe that they are shaded, having a
+deep spot in the centre with a paler shadow round it.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 45.
+
+Face of the sun projected on a sheet of cardboard C. T, Telescope. _f_,
+Finder. _og_, Object-glass. _ep_, Eye-piece. S, Screen shutting off the
+diffused light from the window.]
+
+As, however, you cannot all use the telescopes, and those who can will
+find it difficult to point them truly on to the sun, we will adopt still
+another plan. I will turn the object-glass of my portable telescope full
+upon the sun's face, and bringing a large piece of cardboard on an easel
+near to the other end, draw it slowly backward till the eye-piece forms
+a clear sharp image upon it (see Fig. 45). This you can all see
+clearly, especially as I have passed the eye-piece of the telescope
+through a large screen _s_, which shuts off the light from the window.
+
+You have now an exact image of the face of the sun and the few dark
+spots which are upon it, and we have brought, as it were, into our room
+that great globe of light and heat which sustains all the life and
+vigour upon our earth.
+
+This small image can, however, tell us very little. Let us next see what
+photography can show us. The diagram (Fig. 46) shows a photograph of the
+sun taken by Mr. Selwyn in October 1860. Let me describe how this is
+done. You will remember that there is a point in the telescope tube
+where the rays of light form a real image of the object at which the
+telescope is pointed (see p. 44). Now an astronomer who wishes to take a
+photograph of the sun takes away the eye-piece of his telescope and puts
+a photographic plate in the tube exactly at the place where this real
+image is formed. He takes care to blacken the frame of the plate and
+shuts up this end of the telescope and the plate in a completely dark
+box, so that no diffused light from outside can reach it. Then he turns
+his telescope upon the sun that it may print its image.
+
+But the sun's light is so strong that even in a second of time it would
+print a great deal too much, and all would be black and confused. To
+prevent this he has a strip of metal which slides across the tube of the
+telescope in front of the plate, and in the upper part of this strip a
+very fine slit is cut. Before he begins, he draws the metal up so that
+the slit is outside the tube and the solid portion within, and he
+fastens it in this position by a thread drawn through and tied to a bar
+outside. Then he turns his telescope on the sun, and as soon as he
+wishes to take the photograph he cuts the thread. The metal slides
+across the tube with a flash, the slit passing across it and out again
+below in the hundredth part of a second, and in that time the sun has
+printed through the slit the picture before you.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 46.
+
+Photograph of the face of the sun, taken by Mr. Selwyn, October 1860,
+showing spots, faculae, and mottled surface.]
+
+In it you will observe at least two things not visible on our
+card-image. The spots, though in a different position from where we see
+them to-day, look much the same, but round them we see also some bright
+streaks called _faculae_, or torches, which often appear in any region
+where a spot is forming, while the whole face of the sun appears mottled
+with bright and darker spaces intermixed. Those of you who have the
+telescopes can see this mottling quite distinctly through them if you
+look at the sun. The bright points have been called by many names, and
+are now generally known as "light granules," as good a name, perhaps, as
+any other.
+
+This is all our photograph can tell us, but the round disc there shown,
+which is called the _photosphere_, or light-giving sphere, is by no
+means the whole of the sun, though it is all we see daily with the naked
+eye. Whenever a total eclipse of the sun takes place--by the dark body
+of the moon coming between us and it, so as to shut out the whole of
+this disc--a brilliant white halo, called the crown or _corona_, is seen
+to extend for many thousands of miles all round the darkened globe. It
+varies very much in shape, sometimes forming a kind of irregular square,
+sometimes a circle with off-shoots, as in Fig. 47, which shows what
+Major Tennant saw in India during the total eclipse of August 18, 1868,
+and at other times it shoots out in long pearly white jets and sheets of
+light with dark spaces between. On the whole it varies periodically. At
+the time of few sun-spots its extensions are equatorial; but when the
+sun's face is much covered with spots, they are diagonal, stretching
+away from the spot-zones, but not nearly so far.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 47.
+
+Total eclipse of the sun, as drawn by Major Tennant at Guntoor in India,
+August 18, 1868, showing corona and the protuberances seen at the
+beginning of totality.]
+
+And besides this corona there are seen very curious flaming projections
+on the edge of the sun, which begin to appear as soon as the moon covers
+the bright disc. In our diagram (Fig. 47) you see them on the left side
+where the moon is just creeping over the limits of the photosphere and
+shutting out the strong light of the sun as the eclipse becomes total. A
+very little later they are better seen on the other side just before the
+bright edge of the sun is uncovered as the moon passes on its way. These
+projections in the real sun are of a bright red colour, and they take on
+all manners of strange shapes, sometimes looking like ranges of fiery
+hills, sometimes like gigantic spikes and scimitars, sometimes even like
+branching fiery trees. They were called _prominences_ before their
+nature was well understood, and will probably always keep that name. It
+would be far better, however, if some other name such as "glowing
+clouds" or "red jets" could be used, for there is now no doubt that they
+are jets of gases, chiefly hydrogen, constantly playing over the face of
+the sun, though only seen when his brighter light is quenched. They have
+been found to shoot up 20,000, 80,000, and even as much as 350,000 miles
+beyond the edge of the shining disc; and this last means that the flames
+were so gigantic that if they had started from our earth they would have
+reached beyond the moon. We shall see presently that astronomers are now
+able by the help of the spectroscope to see the prominences even when
+there is no eclipse, and we know them to be permanent parts of the
+bright globe.
+
+This gives us at last the whole of the sun, so far as we know. There is,
+indeed, a strange faint zodiacal light, a kind of pearly glow seen after
+sunset or before sunrise extending far beyond the region of the corona;
+but we understand so little about this that we cannot be sure that it
+actually belongs to the sun.
+
+And now how shall I best give you an idea of what little we do know
+about this great surging monster of light and heat which shines down
+upon us? You must give me all your attention, for I want to make the
+facts quite clear, that you may take a firm hold upon them.
+
+Our first step is to question the sunlight which comes to us; and this
+we do with the spectroscope. Let me remind you how we read the story of
+light through this instrument. Taking in a narrow beam of light through
+a fine slit, we pass the beam through a lens to make the rays parallel,
+and then throw it upon a prism or row of prisms, so that each set of
+waves of coloured light coming through the slit is bent on its own road
+and makes an upright image of the slit on any screen or telescope put to
+receive it (see Fig. 21, p. 52). Now when the light we examine comes
+from a glowing solid, like white-hot iron, or a glowing liquid, or a gas
+under such enormous pressure that it behaves like a liquid, then the
+images of the slit always overlap each other, so that we see a
+continuous unbroken band of colour. However much you spread out the
+light you can never break up or separate the spectrum in any part.[1]
+But when you send the light, of a glowing gas such as hydrogen through
+the spectroscope, or of a substance melted into gas or vapour, such as
+sodium or iron vaporised by great heat, then it is a different story.
+Such gases give only a certain number of bright lines quite separate
+from each other on the dark background, and each kind of gas gives its
+own peculiar lines; so that even when several are glowing together there
+is no confusion, but when you look at them through the spectroscope you
+can detect the presence of each gas by its own lines in the spectrum.
+
+ [1] Two rare earths, Erbia and Didymium, form an exception to this,
+ but they do not concern us here.
+
+[Illustration: TABLE OF SPECTRA. Plate I.]
+
+To make quite sure of this we will close the shutters and put a pinch of
+salt in a spirit-flame. Salt is chloride of sodium, and in the flame the
+sodium glows with a bright yellow light. Look at this light through your
+small direct-vision spectroscopes[1] and you see at once the bright
+yellow double-line of sodium (No. 3, Plate I.) start into view across
+the faint continuous spectrum given by the spirit-flame. Next I will
+show you glowing hydrogen. I have here a glass tube containing hydrogen,
+so arranged that by connecting two wires fastened to it with the
+induction coil of our electric battery it will soon glow with a bright
+red colour. Look at this through your spectroscopes and you will see
+three bright lines, one red, one greenish blue, and one indigo blue,
+standing out on the dark background (No. 4, Plate I.)
+
+ [1] A direct-vision spectroscope is like a small telescope with
+ prisms arranged inside the tube. The object-glass end is covered by
+ two pieces of metal, which slide backwards and forwards by means of
+ a screw, so that a narrow or broad slit can be opened.
+
+Think for a moment what a grand power this gives you of reading as in a
+book the different gases which are glowing in the sky even billions of
+miles away. You would never mistake the lines of hydrogen for the line
+of sodium, but when looking at a nebula or any mass of glowing gas you
+could say at once "sodium is glowing there," or "that cloud must be
+composed of hydrogen."
+
+Now, opening the shutters, look at the sunlight through your
+spectroscopes. Here you have something different from either the
+continuous spectrum of solids, or the bright separate lines of gases,
+for while you have a bright-coloured band you have also some dark lines
+crossing it (No. 2, Plate I.) It is those dark lines which enable us to
+guess what is going on in the sun before the light comes to us. In 1859
+Professor Kirchhoff made an experiment which explained those dark lines,
+and we will repeat it now. Take a good look at the sunlight spectrum, to
+fix the lines in your memory, and then close the shutters again.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 48.
+
+Kirchhoff's experiment, explaining the dark lines in sunlight.
+
+A, Limelight dispersed through a prism. _s_, Slit through which the beam
+of light comes. _l_, Lens bringing it to a focus on the prism _p_. _sp_,
+Continuous spectrum thrown on the wall. B, The same light, with the
+flame _f_ containing glowing sodium placed in front of it. D, Dark
+sodium line appearing in the spectrum.]
+
+I have here our magic-lantern with its lime-light, in which the solid
+lime glows with a white heat, in consequence of the jets of oxygen and
+hydrogen burning round it. This was the light Kirchhoff used, and you
+know it will give a continuous bright band in the spectroscope. I put a
+cap with a narrow slit in it over the lantern tube, so as to get a
+narrow beam of light; in front of this I put a lens _l_, and in front of
+this again the prism _p_. The slit and the prism act exactly like your
+spectroscopes, and you can all see the continuous spectrum on the screen
+(_sp_, A, Fig. 48). Next I put a lighted lamp of very weak spirit in
+front of the slit, and find that it makes no difference, for whatever
+light it gives only strengthens the spectrum. But now notice carefully.
+I am going to put a little salt into the flame, and you would expect
+that the sodium in it, when turned to glowing vapour, causing it to look
+yellow, would strengthen the yellow part of the spectrum and give a
+bright line. This is what Kirchhoff expected, but to his intense
+surprise he saw as you do now a _dark line_ D start out where the bright
+line should have been.
+
+What can have happened? It is this. The oxyhydrogen light is very hot
+indeed, the spirit flame with the sodium is comparatively weak and cool.
+So when those special coloured waves of the oxyhydrogen light which
+agree with those of the sodium light reached the flame, they spent all
+their energy in heating up those waves to their own temperature, and
+while all the other coloured rays travelled on and reached the screen,
+these waves were stopped or _absorbed_ on the way, and consequently
+there was a blank, black space in the spectrum where they should have
+been. If I could put a hydrogen flame cooler than the original light in
+the road, then there would be three dark lines where the bright hydrogen
+lines should be, and so with every other gas. _The cool vapour in front
+of the hot light cuts off from the white ray exactly those waves which
+it gives out itself when burning._
+
+Thus each black line of the sun-spectrum (No. 2, Plate I.), tells us
+that some particular ray of sunlight has been absorbed by a cooler
+vapour _of its own kind_ somewhere between the sun and us, and it must
+be in the sun itself, for when we examine other stars we often find dark
+lines in their spectrum different from those in the sun, and this shows
+that the missing rays must have been stopped close at home, for if they
+were stopped in our atmosphere they would all be alike.
+
+There are, by the bye, some lines which we know are caused by our
+atmosphere, especially when it is full of invisible water vapour, and
+these we easily detect, because they show more distinctly when the sun
+is low and shines through a thicker layer of air than when he is high up
+and shines through less.
+
+But to return to the sun. In your small spectroscopes you see very few
+dark lines, but in larger and more perfect ones they can be counted by
+thousands, and can be compared with the bright lines of glowing gases
+burnt here on earth. In the spectrum of glowing iron vapour 460 lines
+are found to agree with dark lines in the sun-spectrum, and other gases
+have nearly as many. Still, though thousands of lines can now be
+explained, by matching them with the bright lines of known gases, the
+whole secret of sunlight is not yet solved, for the larger number of
+lines still remain a riddle to be read.
+
+We see then that the spectroscope teaches us that the round light-giving
+disc or photosphere of the sun consists of a bright and intensely hot
+light shining behind a layer of cooler though still very hot vapours,
+which form a kind of shell of luminous clouds around it, and in this
+shell, or _reversing layer_--as it is often called, because it turns
+light to darkness--we have proved that iron, lead, copper, zinc,
+aluminum, magnesium, potassium, sodium, carbon, hydrogen, and many other
+substances common to our earth, exist in a state of vapour for a depth
+of perhaps 1000 miles.
+
+You will easily understand that when the spectroscope had told so much,
+astronomers were eager to learn what it would reveal about the
+prominences or red jets seen during eclipses, and they got an answer in
+India during that same eclipse of August 1868 which is shown in our
+diagram (Fig. 47). Making use of the time during which the prominences
+were seen, they turned the telescope upon them with a spectroscope
+attached to it, and saw a number of bright lines start out, of which the
+chief were the three bright lines of hydrogen, showing that these
+curious appearances are really flames of glowing gas.
+
+In the same year Professor Jannsen and Mr. Lockyer succeeded in seeing
+the bright lines of the prominences in full sunlight. This was done in a
+very simple way, when once it was discovered to be possible, and though
+my apparatus (Fig. 49) is very primitive compared with some now made, it
+will serve to explain the method.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 49.
+
+The spectroscope attached to the telescope for the examination of the
+sun. (Lockyer.)
+
+P, Pillar of Telescope. T, Telescope. S, Finder or small telescope for
+pointing the telescope in position. _a_, _a_, _b_, Supports fastening
+the spectroscope to the telescope. _d_, Collimator or tube carrying the
+slit at the end nearest the telescope, and a lens at the other end to
+render the rays parallel. _c_, Plate on which the prisms are fixed. _e_,
+Small telescope through which the observer examines the spectrum after
+the ray has been dispersed in the prisms. _h_, Micrometer for measuring
+the relative distance of the lines.]
+
+When an astronomer wishes to examine the spectrum of any special part of
+the sun, he takes off the eye-piece of his telescope and screws the
+spectroscope upon the draw-tube. The spectroscope is made exactly like
+the large one for ordinary work. The tube _d_ (Fig. 49) carries the slit
+at the end nearest the telescope, and this slit must be so placed as to
+stand precisely at the principal focus of the lens where the sun's image
+is formed (see _i_, _i_, p. 44). This comes to exactly the same thing as
+if we could put the slit close against the face of the sun, so as to
+show only the small strip which it covers, and by moving it to one part
+or another of the image we can see any point that we wish and no other.
+The light then passes through the tube _d_ into the round of prisms
+standing on the tray _c_, and the observer looking through the small
+telescope _e_ sees the spectrum as it emerges from the last prism. In
+this way astronomers can examine the spectrum of a spot, or part of a
+spot, or of a bright streak, or any other mark on the sun's face.
+
+Now in looking at the prominences we have seen that the difficulty is
+caused by the sunlight, between us and them, overpowering the bright
+lines of the gas, nor could we overcome this if it were not for a
+difference which exists between the two kinds of light. The more you
+disperse or spread out the continuous sun-spectrum the fainter it
+becomes, but in spreading out the bright lines of the gas you only send
+them farther and farther apart; they themselves remain almost as bright
+as ever. So, when the telescope forms an image of the red flame in front
+of the slit, though the glowing gas and the sunlight both send rays into
+the spectroscope, you have only to use enough prisms and arrange them in
+such a way that the sunlight is dispersed into a very long faint
+spectrum, and then the bright lines of the flames will stand out bright
+and clear. Of course only a small part of the long spectrum can be seen
+at once, and the lines must be studied separately. On the other hand, if
+you want to compare the strong light of the sun with the bright lines of
+the prominences, you place the slit just at the edge of the sun's image
+in the telescope, so that half the slit is on the sun's face and half on
+the prominence. The prisms then disperse the sunlight between you and
+the prominences, while they only lessen the strong light of the sun
+itself, which still shows clearly. In this way the two spectra are seen
+side by side and the dark and bright lines can be compared accurately
+together (see Fig. 50).
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 50.
+
+Bright lines of prominences.
+
+Sun-spectrum with dark lines.]
+
+Wherever the telescope is turned all round the sun the lines of luminous
+gas are seen, showing that they form a complete layer outside the
+photosphere, or light-giving mass, of the sun. This layer of luminous
+gases is called the _chromosphere_, or coloured sphere. It lies between
+the photosphere and the corona, and is supposed to be at least 5000
+miles deep, while, as we have seen, the flames shoot up from it to
+fabulous heights.
+
+The quiet red flames are found to be composed of hydrogen and another
+new metal called helium; but lower down, near the sun's edge, other
+bright lines are seen, showing that sodium, magnesium, and other metals
+are there, and when violent eruptions occur these often surge up and
+mingle with the purer gas above. At other times the eruptions below
+fling the red flames aloft with marvellous force, as when Professor
+Young saw a long low-lying cloud of hydrogen, 100,000 miles long, blown
+into shreds and flung up to a height of 200,000 miles, when the
+fragments streamed away and vanished in two hours. Yet all these violent
+commotions and storms are unseen by us on earth unless we look through
+our magic glasses.
+
+You will wonder no doubt how the spectroscope can show the height and
+the shape of the flames. I will explain to you, and I hope to show them
+you one day. You must remember that the telescope makes a small real
+image of the flame at its focus, just as in one of our earlier
+experiments you saw the exact image of the candle-flame upside down on
+the paper (see p. 33). The reason why we only see a strip of the flame
+in the spectroscope is because the slit is so narrow. But when once the
+sunlight was dispersed so as no longer to interfere, Dr. Huggins found
+that it is possible to open the slit wide enough to take in the image of
+the whole flame, and then, by turning the spectroscope so as to bring
+one of the bright hydrogen lines into view, the actual shape of the
+prominence is seen, only it will look a different colour, either red,
+greenish-blue, or indigo-blue, according to the line chosen. As the
+image of the whole sun and its appendages in the telescope is so very
+small, you will understand that even a very narrow slit will really take
+in a very large prominence several thousand miles in length. Fig 51
+shows a drawing by Mr. Lockyer of a group of flames he observed very
+soon after Dr. Huggins suggested the open slit, and these shapes did not
+last long, for in another picture he drew ten minutes later their
+appearance had already changed.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 51.
+
+Red prominences, as drawn by Mr. Lockyer during the total eclipse of
+March 14, 1869.]
+
+These then are some of the facts revealed to us by our magic glasses. I
+scarcely expect you to remember all the details I have given you, but
+you will at least understand now how astronomers actually penetrate into
+the secrets of the sun by bringing its image into their observatory, as
+we brought it to-day on the card-board, and then making it tell its own
+tale through the prisms of the spectroscope; and you will retain some
+idea of the central light of the sun with its surrounding atmosphere of
+cooler gases and its layer of luminous lambent gases playing round it
+beyond.
+
+Of the corona I cannot tell you much, except that it is far more subtle
+than anything we have spoken of yet; that it is always strongest when
+the sun is most spotted; that it is partly made up of self-luminous
+gases whose bright lines we can see, especially an unknown green ray;
+while it also shines partly by reflected light from the sun, for we can
+trace in it faint dark lines; lastly it fades away into the mysterious
+zodiacal light, and so the sun ends in mystery at its outer fringe as it
+began at its centre.
+
+And now at last, having learnt something of the material of the sun, we
+can come back to the spots and ask what is known about them. As I have
+said, they are not always the same on the sun's face. On the contrary,
+they vary very much both in number and size. In some years the sun's
+face is quite free from them, at others there are so many that they form
+two wide belts on each side of the sun's equator, with a clear space of
+about six degrees between. No spots ever appear near the poles. Herr
+Schwabe, who watched the sun's face patiently for more than thirty
+years, has shown that it is most spotted about every eleven years, then
+the spots disappear very quickly and reappear slowly till the full-spot
+time comes round again.
+
+Some spots remain a very short time and then break up and disappear, but
+others last for days, weeks, and even months, and when we watch these,
+we find that a spot appears to travel slowly across the face of the sun
+from east to west and then round the western edge so that it disappears.
+It is when it reaches the edge that we can convince ourselves that the
+spot is really part of the sun, for there is no space to be seen between
+them, the edge and the spot are one, as the last trace of the dark
+blotch passes out of sight. In fact, it is not the spot which has
+crossed the sun's face, but the sun itself which has turned, like our
+earth, upon its axis, carrying the spot round with it. As some spots
+remain long enough to reappear, after about twelve or thirteen days, on
+the opposite edge, and even pass round two or three times, astronomers
+can reckon that the sun takes about twenty-five days and five hours in
+performing one revolution. You will wonder why I say only _about_
+twenty-five, but I do so because all spots do not come round in exactly
+the same time, those farthest from the equator lag rather more than a
+day behind those nearer to it, and this is explained by the layer of
+gases in which they are formed, drifting back in higher latitudes as the
+sun turns.
+
+It is by watching a spot as it travels across the sun, that we are able
+to observe that the centre partlies deeper in the sun's face than the
+outer rim. There are many ways of testing this, and you can try one
+yourselves with a telescope if you watch day after day. I will explain
+it by a simple experiment. I have here a round lump of stiff dough, in
+which I have made a small hollow and blackened the bottom with a drop of
+ink. As I turn this round, so that the hollow facing you moves from
+right to left, you will see that after it passes the middle of the face,
+the hole appears narrower and narrower till it disappears, and if you
+observe carefully you will note that the dark centre is the first thing
+you lose sight of, while the edges of the cup are still seen, till just
+before the spot disappears altogether. But now I will stick a wafer on,
+and a pea half into, the dough, marking the centre of each with ink.
+Then I turn the ball again. This time you lose sight of the foremost
+edge first, and the dark centre is seen almost to the last moment. This
+shows that if the spots were either flat marks, or hillocks, on the
+sun's face, the dark centre would remain to the last, but as a fact it
+disappears before the rim. Father Secchi has tried to measure the depth
+of a spot-cavity, and thinks they vary from 1000 to 3000 miles deep. But
+there are many difficulties in interpreting the effects of light and
+shadow at such an enormous distance, and some astronomers still doubt
+whether spots are really depressions.
+
+For many centuries now the spots have been watched forming and
+dispersing, and this is roughly speaking what is seen to happen. When
+the sun is fairly clear and there are few spots, these generally form
+quietly, several black dots appearing and disappearing with bright
+streaks or _faculae_ round their edge, till one grows bigger than the
+rest, and forms a large dark nucleus, round which, after a time, a
+half-shadow or _penumbra_ is seen and we have a sun-spot complete, with
+bright edges, dark shadow, and deep black centre (Fig. 52). This lasts
+for a certain time and then it becomes bridged over with light streaks,
+the dark spot breaks up and disappears, and last of all the half-shadow
+dies away.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 52.
+
+A quiet sun-spot. (Secchi.)]
+
+But things do not always take place so quietly. When the sun's face is
+very troubled and full of spots, the bright _faculae_, which appear with
+a spot, seem to heave and wave, and generally several dark centres form
+with whirling masses of light round them, while in some of them tongues
+of fire appear to leap up from below (Fig. 53). Such spots change
+quickly from day to day, even if they remain for a long time, until at
+last by degrees the dark centres become less distinct, the half-shadows
+disappear, leaving only the bright streaks, which gradually settle down
+into luminous points or _light granules_. These light granules are in
+fact supposed by astronomers to be the tips of glowing clouds heaving up
+everywhere, while the dark spaces between them are cooler currents
+passing downwards.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 53.
+
+A tumultuous sun-spot. (Langley.)]
+
+Below these clouds, no doubt, the great mass of the sun is in a violent
+state of heat and commotion, and when from time to time, whether
+suddenly or steadily, great upheavals and eruptions take place, bright
+flames dart up and luminous clouds gather and swell, so that long
+streaks or _faculae_ surge upon the face of the sun.
+
+Now these hot gases rising up thus on all sides would leave room below
+for cooler gases to pour down from above, and these, as we know, would
+cut off, or absorb, much of the light coming from the body of the sun,
+so that the centre, where the down current was the strongest, would
+appear black even though some light would pass through. This is the best
+explanation we have as yet of the formation of a sun-spot, and many
+facts shown in the spectroscope help to confirm it, as for example the
+thickening of the dark lines of the spectrum when the slit is placed
+over the centre of a spot, and the flashing out of bright lines when an
+uprush of streaks occurs either across the spots or round it.
+
+And now, before you go, I must tell you of one of these wonderful
+uprushes, which sent such a thrill through our own atmosphere, as to
+tell us very plainly the power which the sun has over our globe. The
+year 1859 was remarkable for sun-spots, and on September 1, when two
+astronomers many miles apart were examining them, they both saw, all at
+once, a sudden cloud of light far brighter than the general surface of
+the sun burst out in the midst of a group of spots. The outburst began
+at eight minutes past eleven in the forenoon, and in five minutes it was
+gone again, but in that time it had swept across a space of 35,000 miles
+on the sun! Now both before and after this violent outburst took place
+a magnetic storm raged all round the earth, brilliant auroras were seen
+in all parts of the world, sparks flashed from the telegraph wires, and
+the telegraphic signalmen at Washington and Philadelphia received severe
+electric shocks. Messages were interrupted, for the storm took
+possession of the wires and sent messages of its own, the magnetic
+needles darting to and fro as though seized with madness. At the
+very instant when the bright outburst was seen in the sun, the
+self-registering instruments at Kew marked how three needles jerked all
+at once wildly aside; and the following night the skies were lit up with
+wondrous lights as the storm of electric agitation played round the
+earth.
+
+We are so accustomed to the steady glow of sunshine pouring down upon us
+that we pay very little heed to daylight, though I hope none of us are
+quite so ignorant as the man who praised the moon above the sun, because
+it shone in the dark night, whereas the sun came in the daytime when
+there was light enough already! Yet probably many of us do not actually
+realise how close are the links which bind us to our brilliant star as
+he carries us along with him through space. It is only when an unusual
+outburst occurs, such as I have just described, that we feel how every
+thrill which passes through our atmosphere, through the life-current of
+every plant, and through the fibre and nerve of every animal has some
+relation to the huge source of light, heat, electricity, and magnetism
+at which we are now gazing across a space of more than 93,000,000 miles.
+Yet it is well to remember that the sudden storm and the violent
+eruption are the exceptional occurrences, and that their use to us as
+students is chiefly to lead us to understand the steady and constant
+thrill which, never ceasing, never faltering, fulfils the great purpose
+of the unseen Lawgiver in sustaining all movement and life in our little
+world.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+AN EVENING AMONG THE STARS
+
+
+[Illustration]
+
+"Do you love the stars?" asked the magician of his lads, as they crowded
+round him on the college green, one evening in March, to look through
+his portable telescope.
+
+"Have you ever sat at the window on a clear frosty night, or in the
+garden in summer, and looked up at those wondrous lights in the sky,
+pondering what they are, and what purpose they serve?"
+
+I will confess to you that when I lived in London I did not think much
+about the stars, for in the streets very few can be seen at a time even
+on a clear night; and during the long evenings in summer, when town
+people visit the country, you must stay up late to see a brilliant
+display of starlight. It is when driving or walking across country on a
+winter's evening week after week, and looking all round the sky, that
+the glorious suns of heaven force you to take notice of them; and Orion
+becomes a companion with his seven brilliant stars and his magnificent
+nebula, which appears as a small pale blue patch, to eyes accustomed to
+look for it, when the night is very bright and clear. It is then that
+Charles's Wain becomes quite a study in all its different positions, its
+horses now careering upwards, now plunging downwards, while the waggon,
+whether upwards or downwards, points ever true, by the two stars of its
+tail-board, to the steadfast pole-star.
+
+It is on such nights as these that, looking southward from Orion, we
+recognise the dog-star Sirius, bright long before other stars have
+conquered the twilight, and feast our eye upon his glorious white beams;
+and then, turning northwards, are startled by the soft lustrous sheen of
+Vega just appearing above the horizon.
+
+But stop, I must remember that I have not yet introduced you to these
+groups of stars; and moreover that, though we shall find them now in the
+positions I mention, yet if you look for them a few hours later
+to-night, or at the same hour later in the year, you will not find them
+in the same places in the sky. For as our earth turns daily on its axis,
+the stars _appear_ to alter their position hour by hour, and in the same
+way as we travel yearly on our journey round the sun, they _appear_ to
+move in the sky month by month. Yet with a little practice it is easy to
+recognise the principal stars, for, as it is our movement and not theirs
+which makes us see them in different parts of the sky, they always
+remain in the same position with regard to each other. In a very short
+time, with the help of such a book as Proctor's _Star Atlas_; you could
+pick out all the chief constellations and most conspicuous stars for
+yourselves.
+
+One of the best ways is to take note of the stars each night as they
+creep out one by one after sunset. If you take your place at the window
+to-morrow night as the twilight fades away, you will see them gradually
+appear, now in one part, now in another of the sky, as
+
+ "One by one each little star
+ Sits on its golden throne."
+
+The first to appear will be Sirius or the dog-star (see Fig. 54), that
+pure white star which you can observe now rather low down to the south,
+and which belongs to the constellation _Canis Major_. As Sirius is one
+of the most brilliant stars in the sky, he can be seen very soon after
+the sun is gone at this time of year. If, however, you had any doubt as
+to what star he was, you would not doubt long, for in a little while two
+beautiful stars start into view above him more to the west, and between
+them three smaller ones in a close row, forming the cross in the
+constellation of Orion, which is always very easy to recognise. Now the
+three stars of Orion's belt which make the short piece of the cross
+always point to Sirius, while Betelgeux in his right shoulder, and Rigel
+in his left foot (see Figs. 54 and 55), complete the long piece, and
+these all show very early in the twilight. You would have to wait longer
+for the other two leading stars, Bellatrix in the right shoulder and
+[Greek: k] Orionis in the right leg, for these stars are feebler and
+only seen when the light has faded quite away.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 54.
+
+Some of the constellations seen when looking south in March from six to
+nine o'clock.]
+
+By that time you would see that there are an immense number of stars in
+Orion visible even to the naked eye, besides the veil of misty, tiny
+stars called the "Milky Way" which passes over his arm and club. Yet the
+figure of the huntsman is very difficult to trace, and the seven bright
+stars, the five of the cross and those in the left arm and knee, are all
+you need remember.
+
+No! not altogether all, for on a bright clear night like this you can
+detect a faint greenish blue patch (N, Fig. 54) just below the belt, and
+having a bright star in the centre. This is called the "Great Nebula" or
+mist of Orion (see Frontispiece). With your telescopes it looks very
+small indeed, for only the central and brightest part is seen. Really,
+however, it is so widespread that our whole solar system is as nothing
+compared to it. But even your telescopes will show, somewhere near the
+centre, what appears to be a bright and very beautiful star (see Fig.
+55) surrounded by a darker space than the rest of the nebula, while in
+my telescope you will see many stars scattered over the mist.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 55.
+
+Chief stars of Orion, with Aldebaran. (After Proctor.)]
+
+Now first let me tell you that these last stars do not, so far as we
+know, lie _in_ the nebula, but are scattered about in the heavens
+between us and it, perhaps millions of miles nearer our earth. But with
+the bright star in the centre it is different, for the spectroscope
+tells us that the mist passes _over_ it, so that it is either behind or
+in the nebula. Moreover, this star is very interesting, for it is not
+really one star, but six arranged in a group (see Fig. 56). You can see
+four distinctly through my telescope, forming a trapezium or four-sided
+figure, and more powerful instruments show two smaller ones. So [Greek:
+th] Orionis, or the Trapezium of Orion, is a multiple star, probably
+lying in the midst of the nebula.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 56.
+
+The trapezium, [Greek: th] Orionis, in the nebula of Orion. (Herschel.)]
+
+The next question is, What is the mist itself composed of? For a long
+time telescopes could give us no answer. At last one night Lord Rosse,
+looking through his giant telescope at the densest part of the nebula,
+saw myriads of minute stars which had never been seen before. "Then,"
+you will say, "it is after all only a cluster of stars too small for our
+telescopes to distinguish." Wait a bit; it is always dangerous to draw
+hasty conclusions from single observations. What Lord Rosse said was
+true as to that particular part of the nebula, but not the whole truth
+even there, and not at all true of other parts, as the spectroscope
+tells us.
+
+For though the light of nebulae, or luminous mists, is so faint that a
+spectrum can only be got by most delicate operations, yet Dr. Huggins
+has succeeded in examining several. Among these is the nebula of Orion,
+and we now know that when the light of the mist is spread out it gives,
+not a continuous band of colour such as would be given by stars, but
+_faint coloured lines_ on a dark ground (see Fig. 57). Such lines as
+these we have already learnt are always given by gases, and the
+particular bright lines thrown by Orion's nebula answer to those given
+by nitrogen and hydrogen, and some other unknown gases. So we learn at
+last that the true mist of the nebula is formed of glowing gas, while
+parts have probably a great number of minute stars in them.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 57.
+
+Nebula-spectrum.
+
+Sun-spectrum.
+
+Spectrum of Orion's Nebula, showing bright lines, with sun-spectrum
+below for comparison.]
+
+Till within a very short time ago only those people who had access to
+very powerful telescopes could see the real appearance of Orion, for
+drawings made of it were necessarily very imperfect; but now that
+telescopes have been made expressly for carrying photographic
+appliances, even these faint mists print their own image for us. In 1880
+Professor Draper of America photographed the nebula of Orion, in March
+1881 Mr. Common got a still better effect, and last year Mr. Isaac
+Roberts succeeded in taking the most perfect and beautiful photograph[1]
+yet obtained, in which the true beauty of this wonderful mist stands out
+clearly. I have marked on the edge of our copy two points [Greek: th]
+and [Greek: th]', and if you follow out straight lines from these points
+till they meet, you will arrive at the spot where the multiple star
+lies. It cannot, however, be seen here, because the plate was exposed
+for three hours and a half, and after a time the mist prints itself so
+densely as to smother the light of the stars. Look well at this
+photograph when you go indoors and fix it on your memory, and then on
+clear nights accustom your eye to find the nebula below the three stars
+of the belt, for it tells a wonderful story.
+
+ [1] Reproduced in the Frontispiece with Mr. Roberts's kind permission.
+ The star-halo at the top of the plate is caused by diffraction of
+ light in the telescope, and comes only from an ordinary star.
+
+More than a hundred years ago the great German philosopher Kant
+suggested that our sun, our earth, and all the heavenly bodies might
+have begun as gases, and the astronomer Laplace taught this as the most
+likely history of their formation. After a few years, however, when
+powerful telescopes showed that many of the nebulae were only clusters of
+very minute stars, astronomers thought that Laplace's teaching had been
+wrong. But now the spectroscope has revealed to us glowing gas actually
+filling large spaces in the sky, and every year accurate observations
+and experiments tell us more and more about these marvellous distant
+mists. Some day, though perhaps not while you or I are here to know it,
+Orion's nebula, with its glowing gas and minute star-dust, may give some
+clue to the early history of the heavenly bodies; and for this reason I
+wish you to recognise and ponder over it, as I have often done, when it
+shines down on the rugged moor in the stillness of a clear frosty
+winter's night.
+
+But we must pass on for, while I have been talking, the whole sky has
+become bespangled with hundreds of stars. That glorious one to the west,
+which you can find by following (Fig. 54) a curved line upwards from
+Betelgeux, is the beautiful red star Aldebaran or the hindmost; so
+called by the Arabs, because he drives before him that well-known
+cluster, the Pleiades, which we reach by continuing the curve westwards
+and upwards. Stop to look at this cluster through your telescopes, for
+it will delight you; even with the naked eye you can count from six to
+ten stars in it, and an opera-glass will show about thirty, though they
+are so scattered you will have to move the glass about to find them. Yet
+though my telescope shows a great many more, you cannot even count all
+the chief ones through it, for in powerful telescopes more than 600
+stars have been seen in the single cluster! while a photograph taken by
+Mr. Roberts shows also four lovely patches of nebula.
+
+And now from the Pleiades let us pass on directly overhead to the
+beautiful star Capella, which once was red but now is blue, and drop
+down gently to the south-east, where Castor and Pollux, the two most
+prominent stars in the constellation "Gemini" or the twins, show
+brilliantly against the black sky. Pause here a moment, for I want to
+tell you something about Castor, the one nearest to Capella. If you look
+at Castor through your telescopes, some of you may possibly guess that
+it is really two stars, but you will have to look through mine to see it
+clearly. These two stars have been watched carefully for many years, and
+there is now no doubt that one of them is moving slowly round the other.
+Such stars as these are called "binary," to distinguish them from stars
+that merely _appear_ double because they stand nearly in a line one
+behind the other in the heavens, although they may be millions of miles
+apart. But "binary" stars are actually moving in one system, and revolve
+round each other as our earth moves round the sun.
+
+I wonder if it strikes you what a grand discovery this is? You will
+remember that it is gravitation which keeps the moon held to the earth
+so that it moves round in a circle, and which keeps the earth and other
+planets moving round the sun. But till these binary stars were
+discovered we had no means of guessing that this law had any force
+beyond our own solar system. Now, however, we learn that the same law
+and order which reigns in our small group of planets is in action
+billions of miles away among distant suns, so that they are held
+together and move round each other as our earth moves round our sun. I
+will repeat to you what Sir R. Ball, the Astronomer-Royal of Ireland,
+says about this, for his words have remained in my mind ever since I
+read them, and I should like them to linger in yours till you are old
+enough to feel their force and grandeur. "This discovery," he writes,
+"gave us knowledge we could have gained from no other source. From the
+binary stars came a whisper across the vast abyss of space. That whisper
+told us that the law of gravitation is not peculiar to the solar system.
+It gives us grounds for believing that it is obeyed throughout the
+length, the breadth, the depth, and the height of the entire
+universe."[1]
+
+ [1] _The Story of the Heavens._
+
+And now, leaving Castor and going round to the east, we pass through the
+constellation Leo or the Lion, and I want you particularly to notice six
+stars in the shape of a sickle, which form the front part of the lion,
+the brightest, called Regulus, being the end of the handle.[1] This
+sickle is very interesting, because it marks the part of the heavens
+from which the brilliant shower of November meteors radiates once in
+thirty-three years. This is, however, too long a story to be told
+to-night, so we will pass through Leo, and turning northwards, look high
+up in the north-east (Fig. 58), where "Charles's Wain" stretches far
+across the sky. I need not point this out to you, for every country lad
+knows and delights in it. You could not have seen it in the twilight
+when Sirius first shone out, for these stars are not so powerful as he
+is. But they come out very soon after him, and when once fairly bright,
+the four stars which form the waggon, wider at the top than at the
+bottom, can never be mistaken, and the three stars in front, the last
+bending below the others, are just in the right position for the horses.
+For this reason I prefer the country people's name of Charles's Wain or
+Waggon to that of the "Plough," which astronomers generally give to
+these seven stars. They really form part of an enormous constellation
+called the "Great Bear" (Fig. 59), but, as in the case of Orion, it is
+very difficult to make out the whole of Bruin in the sky.
+
+ [1] In Fig. 54 the sickle alone comes within the picture.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 58.
+
+Some of the constellations seen when looking north in March from six to
+nine o'clock.]
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 59.
+
+The Great Bear, showing the position of Charles's Wain, and also the
+small binary star [Greek: x] in the hind foot, whose period has been
+determined.]
+
+Now, although most people know Charles's Wain when they see it, we may
+still learn a good deal about it. Look carefully at the second star from
+the waggon and you will see another star close to it, called by country
+people "Jack by the second horse," and by astronomers "Alcor." Even in
+your small telescopes you can see that Jack or Alcor is not so close as
+he appears to the naked eye, but a long way off from the horse, while in
+my telescope you will find this second horse (called Mizar) split up
+into two stars, one a brilliant white and the other a pale emerald
+green. We do not know whether these two form a binary, for they have not
+yet been observed to move round each other.
+
+Take care in looking that you do not confuse the stars one with another,
+for you must remember that your telescope makes objects appear upside
+down, and Alcor will therefore appear in it _below_ the two stars
+forming the horse.
+
+But though we do not know whether Mizar is binary, there is a little
+star a long way below the waggon, in the left hind paw of the Great Bear
+([Greek: x], Figs. 58 and 59), which has taught us a great deal, for it
+is composed of two stars, one white and the other grey, which move right
+round each other once in sixty years, so that astronomers have observed
+more than one revolution since powerful telescopes were invented. You
+will have to look in my telescope to see the two stars divided, but you
+can make an interesting observation for yourselves by comparing the
+light of this binary star with the light of Castor, for Castor is such
+an immense distance from us that his light takes more than a hundred
+years to reach us, while the light of this smaller star comes in
+sixty-one years, yet see how incomparably brighter Castor is of the two.
+This proves that brilliant stars are not always the nearest, but that a
+near star may be small and faint and a far-off one large and bright.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 60.
+
+The seven stars of Charles's Wain, showing the directions in which they
+are travelling. (After Proctor.)]
+
+There is another very interesting fact known to us about Charles's Wain
+which I should like you to remember when you look at it. This is that
+the seven stars are travelling onwards in the sky, and not all in the
+same direction. It was already suspected centuries ago that, besides the
+_apparent_ motion of all the stars in the heavens caused by our own
+movements, they have each also a _real_ motion and are travelling in
+space, though they are so inconceivably far off that we do not notice
+it. It has now been proved, by very accurate observations with powerful
+instruments, that three of the stars forming the waggon and the two
+horses nearest to it, together with Jack, are drifting forwards (see
+Fig. 60), while the top star of the tailboard of the waggon and the
+leader of the horses are drifting the other way. Thus, thousands of
+years hence Charles's Wain will most likely have quite altered its
+shape, though so very slowly that each generation will think it is
+unchanged.
+
+One more experiment with Charles's Wain, before we leave it, will help
+you to imagine the endless millions of stars which fill the universe.
+Look up at the waggon and try to count how many stars you can see inside
+it with the naked eye. You may, if your eye is keen, be able to count
+twelve. Now take an opera-glass and the twelve become two hundred. With
+your telescopes they will increase again in number. In my telescope
+upstairs the two hundred become hundreds, while in one of the giant
+telescopes, such as Lord Rosse's in Ireland, or the great telescope at
+Washington in the United States, thousands of stars are brought into
+view within that four-sided space!
+
+Now this part of the sky is not fuller of stars than many others; yet at
+first, looking up as any one might on a clear evening, we thought only
+twelve were there. Cast your eyes all round the heavens. On a clear
+night like this you may perhaps, with the naked eye, have in view about
+3000 stars; then consider that a powerful telescope can multiply these
+by thousands upon thousands, so that we can reckon about 20,000,000
+where you see only 3000. If you add to these the stars that rise later
+at night, and those of the southern hemisphere which never rise in our
+latitude, you would have in all about 50,000,000 stars, which we are
+able to see from our tiny world through our most powerful telescopes.
+
+But we can go farther yet. When our telescopes fail, we turn to our
+other magic seer, the photographic camera, and trapping rays of light
+from stars invisible in the most powerful telescope, make them print
+their image on the photographic plate, and at once our numbers are so
+enormously increased that if we could photograph the whole of the
+heavens as visible from our earth, we should have impressions of at
+least 170,000,000 stars!
+
+These numbers are so difficult to grasp that we had better pass on to
+something easier, and our next step brings us to the one star in the
+heavens which never appears to move, as our world turns. To find it we
+have only to draw a line upwards through the two stars in the tailboard
+of the waggon and on into space. Indeed these two stars are called "the
+Pointers," because a line prolonged onwards from them will, with a very
+slight curve, bring us to the "Pole-star" (see Fig. 58). This star,
+though not one of the largest, is important, because it is very near
+that spot in the sky towards which the North Pole of our earth points.
+The consequence is, that though all the other stars appear to move in a
+circle round the heavens, and to be in different places at different
+seasons, this star remains always in the same place, only appearing to
+describe a very tiny circle in the sky round the exact spot to which our
+North Pole points.
+
+Month after month and year after year it shines exactly over that
+thatched cottage yonder, which you see now immediately below it; and
+wherever you are in the northern hemisphere, if you once note a certain
+tree, or chimney, or steeple which points upwards to the Pole-star, it
+will guide you to it at any hour on any night of the year, though the
+other constellations will be now on one side, now on the other side of
+it.
+
+The Pole-star is really the front horse of a small imitation of
+Charles's Wain, which, however, has never been called by any special
+name, but only part of the "Little Bear." Those two hind stars of the
+tiny waggon, which are so much the brightest, are called the "Guards,"
+because they appear to move in a circle round the Pole-star night after
+night and year after year like sentries.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 61.
+
+The constellation of Cassiopeia, and the heavenly bodies which can be
+found by means of it.[1]]
+
+ [1] For Almach see Fig. 58, it has been accidentally omitted from this
+ figure.
+
+Opposite to them, on the farther side of the Pole-star, is a well-marked
+constellation, a widespread W written in the sky by five large stars;
+the second V of the W has rather a longer point than the first, and as
+we see it now the letter is almost upside down (see Fig. 58).
+
+These are the five brightest stars in the constellation Cassiopeia, with
+a sixth not quite so bright in the third stroke of the W. You can never
+miss them when you have once seen them, even though they lie in the
+midst of a dense layer of the stars of the Milky Way, and if you have
+any difficulty at first, you have only to look as far on the one side of
+the Pole-star as the top hind star of Charles's Wain is on the other,
+and you must find them. I want to use them to-night chiefly as guides to
+find two remarkable objects which I hope you will look at again and
+again. The first is a small round misty patch not easy to see, but which
+you will find by following out the _second_ stroke of the first V of the
+W. Beginning at the top, and following the line to the point of the V,
+continue on across the sky, and then search with your telescope till you
+catch a glimpse of this faint mist (_c_, Fig. 58; star-cluster, Fig.
+61). You will see at once that it is sparkling all over with stars, for
+in fact you have actually before you in that tiny cluster more stars
+than you can see with the naked eye all over the heavens! Think for a
+moment what this means. One faint misty spot in the constellation
+Perseus, which we should have passed over unheeded without a telescope,
+proves to be a group of more than 3000 suns!
+
+The second object you will find more easily, for it is larger and
+brighter, and appears as a faint dull spot to the naked eye. Going back
+to Cassiopeia, follow out the _second_ V in the W from the top to the
+point of the V and onwards till your eye rests upon this misty cloud,
+which is called the Great Nebula of Andromeda, and has sometimes been
+mistaken for a comet (Figs. 58 and 61). You will, however, be
+disappointed when you look through the telescope, for it will still only
+appear a mist, and you will be able to make nothing of it, except that
+instead of being of an irregular shape like Orion, it is elliptical; and
+in a powerful telescope two dark rifts can be seen separating the
+streams of nebulous matter. These rifts are now shown in a photograph
+taken by Mr. Roberts, 1st October 1888, to be two vast dusky rings lying
+between the spiral stream of light, which winds in an ellipse till it
+ends in a small nucleus at the centre.
+
+Ah! you will say, this must be a cloud of gas like Orion's nebula, only
+winding round and round. No! the spectroscope steps in here and tells us
+that the light shows something very much like a continuous spectrum, but
+not as long as it ought to be at the red end. Now, since gases give only
+bright lines, this nebula cannot be entirely gaseous. Then it must be
+made of stars too far off to see? If so, it is very strange that though
+it is so dense and bright in some parts, and so spread out and clear in
+others, the most powerful telescopes cannot break it up into stars. In
+fact, the composition of the great nebula of Andromeda is still a
+mystery, and remains for one of you boys to study when he has become a
+great astronomer.
+
+Still one more strange star we will notice before we leave this part of
+the heavens. You will find it, or at least go very near it, by
+continuing northwards the line you drew from Cassiopeia to the Star
+Cluster (_c_, Fig. 58), and as it is a bright star, you will not miss
+it. That is to say, it is bright to-night and will remain so till
+to-morrow night, but if you come to me about nine o'clock to-morrow
+evening I will show you that it is growing dim, and if we had patience
+to watch through the night we should find, three or four hours later
+still, that it looks like one of the smaller stars. Then it will begin
+to brighten again, and in four hours more will be as bright as at first.
+It will remain so for nearly three days, or, to speak accurately, 2
+days, 20 hours, 48 minutes, and 55 seconds, and then will begin to grow
+dull again. This star is called Algol the Variable. There are several
+such stars in the heavens, and we do not know why they vary, unless
+perhaps some dark globe passes round them, cutting off part of their
+light for a time.
+
+And now, if your eyes are not weary, let us go back to the Pole-star and
+draw a line from it straight down the horizon due north. Shortly before
+we arrive there you will see a very brilliant bluish-white star a little
+to the east of this line. This is Vega, one of the brightest stars in
+the heavens except Sirius. It had not risen in the earlier part of the
+evening, but now it is well up and will appear to go on, steadily
+mounting as it circles round the Pole-star, till at four o'clock
+to-morrow morning it will be right overhead towards the south.
+
+But beautiful as Vega is, a still more interesting star lies close to it
+(see Fig. 58). This small star, called [Greek: e] Lyrae by astronomers,
+looks a little longer in one direction than in the other, and even with
+the naked eye some people can see a division in the middle dividing it
+into two stars. Your telescopes will show them easily, and a powerful
+telescope tells a wonderful story, for it reveals that each of these two
+stars is again composed of two stars, so that [Greek: e] Lyrae (Fig. 62)
+is really a double-double star. There is no doubt that each pair is a
+binary star, that is, the two stars move round each other very slowly,
+and possibly both pairs may also revolve round a common centre. There
+are at least 10,000 double stars in the heavens; though, as we have
+seen, they are not all binary. The list of binary stars, however,
+increases every year as they are carefully examined, and probably about
+one star in three over the whole sky is made up of more than one sun.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 62.
+
+[Greek: e] Lyrae. A double-binary star. Each couple revolves, and the
+couples probably also revolve round each other. (After Chambers.)]
+
+Let us turn the telescope for a short time upon a few of the double
+stars and we shall have a great treat, for one of the most interesting
+facts about them is that both stars are rarely of the same colour. It
+seems strange at first to speak of stars as coloured, but they do not by
+any means all give out the same kind of light. Our sun is yellow, and so
+are the Pole-star and Pollux; but Sirius, Vega, and Regulus are
+dazzling white or bluish-white, Arcturus is a yellowish-white,
+Aldebaran is a bright yellow-red, Betelgeux a deep orange-red, as you
+may see now in the telescope, for he is full in view; while Antares, a
+star in the constellation of the Scorpion, which at this time of year
+cannot be seen till four in the morning, is an intense ruby red.
+
+[Illustration: _Plate II._]
+
+COLOURED DOUBLE STARS.
+
+[Illustration: [Greek: g] _Andromedae_.]
+
+[Illustration: [Greek: e] _Booetis_.]
+
+[Illustration: [Greek: d] _Geminorum_.]
+
+[Illustration: [Greek: a] _Herculis_.]
+
+[Illustration: [Greek: b] _Cygni_.]
+
+[Illustration: [Greek: e] _Cassiopeiae_.]
+
+It appears to be almost a rule with double stars to be of two colours.
+Look up at Almach ([Greek: g] Andromedae), a bright star standing next to
+Algol the Variable in the sweep of four bright stars behind Cassiopeia
+(see Fig. 58). Even to the naked eye he appears to flash in a strange
+way, and in the telescope he appears as two lovely stars, one a deep
+orange and the other a pale green, while in powerful telescopes the
+green one splits again into two (Plate II.) Then again, [Greek: e]
+Cassiopeae, the sixth star lying between the two large ones in the second
+V of Cassiopeia, divides into a yellow star and a small rich purple one,
+and [Greek: d] Geminorum, a bright star not far from Pollux in the
+constellation Gemini, is composed of a large green star and a small
+purple one. Another very famous double star ([Greek: b] Cygni), which
+rises only a little later in the evening, lies below Vega a little to
+the left. It is composed of two lovely stars; one an orange yellow and
+the other blue; while [Greek: e] Booetis, just visible above the horizon,
+is composed of a large yellow star and a very small green one.[1]
+
+ [1] The plate of coloured stars has been most kindly drawn to scale
+ and coloured for me by Mr. Arthur Cottam, F.R.A.S.
+
+There are many other stars of two colours even among the few
+constellations we have picked out to-night, as, for example, the star
+at the top of the tailboard of Charles's Waggon and the second horse
+Mizar. Rigel in Orion, and the two outer stars of the belt, [Greek: a]
+Herculis, which will rise later in the evening, and the beautiful triple
+star ([Greek: z] Cancer) near the Beehive (see Fig. 54), are all
+composed of two or more stars of different colours.
+
+Why do these suns give out such beautiful coloured light? The telescope
+cannot tell us, but the spectroscope again reveals the secrets so long
+hidden from us. By a series of very delicate experiments, Dr. Huggins
+has shown that the light of all stars is sifted before it comes to us,
+just as the light of our sun is; and those rays which are least cut off
+play most strongly on our eyes, and give the colour to the star. The
+question is a difficult one but I will try to give you some idea of it,
+that you may form some picture in your mind of what happens.
+
+We learnt in our last lecture (p. 131) that the light from our sun
+passes through the great atmosphere of vapours surrounding him before it
+goes out into space, and that many rays are in this way cut off; so that
+when we spread out his light in a long spectrum there are dark lines or
+spaces where no light falls.[1] Now in sunlight these dark lines are
+scattered pretty evenly over the spectrum, so that about as much light
+is cut off in one part as in another, and no one colour is stronger than
+the rest.
+
+ [1] See No. 1 in Table of Spectra, Plate I.
+
+Dr. Huggins found, however, that in coloured stars the dark spaces are
+often crowded into particular parts of the long band of colour forming
+the spectrum; showing that many of those light-rays have been cut off
+in the atmosphere round the star, and thus their particular colours are
+dimmed, leaving the other colour or colours more vivid. In red stars,
+for example, the yellow, blue, and green parts of the spectrum are much
+lined while the red end is strong and clear. With blue stars it is just
+the opposite, and the violet end is most free from dark lines. So there
+are really brilliantly coloured suns shining in the heavens, and in many
+cases two or more of these revolve round each other.
+
+And now I have kept your attention and strained your eyes long enough,
+and you have objects to study for many a long evening before you will
+learn to see them plainly. You must not expect to find them every night,
+for the lightest cloud or the faintest moonlight will hide many of them
+from view; and, moreover, though you may learn to use the telescope
+fairly, you will often not know how to get a clear view with it. Still,
+you may learn a great deal, and before we go in I want to put a thought
+into your minds which will make astronomy still more interesting. We
+have seen that the stronger our telescopes the more stars,
+star-clusters, and nebulae we see, and we cannot doubt that there are
+still countless heavenly bodies quite unknown to us. Some years ago
+Bessel the astronomer found that Sirius, in its real motion through the
+heavens, moves irregularly, travelling sometimes a little more slowly
+than at other times, and he suggested that some unseen companion must be
+pulling at him.
+
+Twenty-eight years later, in 1862, two celebrated opticians, father and
+son, both named Alvan Clark, were trying a new telescope at Chicago
+University, when suddenly the son, who was looking at Sirius, exclaimed,
+"Why, father, the star has a companion!" And so it was. The powerful
+telescope showed what Bessel had foretold, and proved Sirius to be a
+"binary" star--that is, as we have seen, a star which has another moving
+round it.
+
+It has since been proved that this companion is twenty-eight times
+farther from Sirius than we are from our sun, and moves round him in
+about forty-nine years. It is seven times as heavy as our sun, and yet
+gives out so little light that only the keenest telescopes can bring it
+into view.
+
+Now if such a large body as this can give so very faint a light that we
+can scarcely see it, though Sirius, which is close to it, shines
+brightest of any star in the heavens, how many more bodies must there be
+which we shall never see, even among those which give out light, while
+how many there are dark like our earth, who can tell?
+
+Now that we know each of the stars to be a brilliant sun, many of them
+far, far brighter than ours, yet so like in their nature and laws, we
+can scarcely help speculating whether round these glorious suns, worlds
+of some kind may not be moving. If so, and there are people in them,
+what a strange effect those double coloured suns must produce with red
+daylight one day and blue daylight another!
+
+Surely, as we look up at the myriads of stars bespangling the sky, and
+remember that our star-sun has seven planets moving round it of which
+one at least--our own earth--is full of living beings, we must picture
+these glorious suns as the centres of unseen systems, so that those
+twinkling specks become as suggestive as the faint lights of a great
+fleet far out at sea, which tell us of mighty ships, together with
+frigates and gunboats, full of living beings, though we cannot see them,
+nor even guess what they may be like. How insignificant we feel when we
+look upon that starlit sky and remember that the whole of our solar
+system would be but a tiny speck of light if seen as far off as we see
+the stars! If our little earth and our short life upon it were all we
+could boast of we should be mites indeed.
+
+But our very study to-night lifts us above these and reminds us that
+there is a spirit within us which even now can travel beyond the narrow
+bounds of our globe, measure the vast distances between us and the
+stars, gauge their brightness, estimate their weight, and discern their
+movements. As we gaze into the depths of the starlit sky, and travel
+onwards and onwards in imagination to those distant stars which
+photography alone reveals to us, do not our hearts leap at the thought
+of a day which must surely come when, fettered and bound no longer to
+earth, this spirit shall wander forth and penetrate some of the mystery
+of those mighty suns at which we now gaze in silent awe.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+LITTLE BEINGS FROM A MINIATURE OCEAN
+
+
+[Illustration]
+
+In our last lecture we soared far away into boundless space, and lost
+ourselves for a time among seen and unseen suns. In this lecture we will
+come back not merely to our little world, nor even to one of the
+widespread oceans which cover so much of it, but to one single pool
+lying just above the limits of low tide, so that it is only uncovered
+for a very short time every day. This pool is to be found in a secluded
+bay within an hour's journey by train from this college, and only a few
+miles from Torquay. It has no name, so far as I know, nor do many people
+visit it, otherwise I should not have kept my little pool so long
+undisturbed. As it is, however, for many years past I have had only to
+make sure as to the time of low tide, and put myself in the train; and
+then, unless the sea was very rough and stormy, I could examine the
+little inhabitants of my miniature ocean in peace.
+
+The pool lies in a deep hollow among a group of rocks and boulders,
+close to the entrance of the cove, which can only be entered at low
+water; it does not measure more than two feet across, so that you can
+step over it, if you take care not to slip on the masses of green and
+brown seaweed growing over the rocks on its sides, as I have done many a
+time when collecting specimens for our salt-water aquarium. I find now
+the only way is to lie flat down on the rock, so that my hands and eyes
+are free to observe and handle, and then, bringing my eye down to the
+edge of the pool, to lift the seaweeds and let the sunlight enter into
+the chinks and crannies. In this way I can catch sight of many a small
+being either on the seaweed or the rocky ledges, and even creatures
+transparent as glass become visible by the thin outline gleaming in the
+sunlight. Then I pluck a piece of seaweed, or chip off a fragment of
+rock with a sharp-edged collecting knife, bringing away the specimen
+uninjured upon it, and place it carefully in its own separate bottle to
+be carried home alive and well.
+
+Now though this little pool and I are old friends, I find new treasures
+in it almost every time I go, for it is almost as full of living things
+as the heavens are of stars, and the tide as it comes and goes brings
+many a mother there to find a safe home for her little ones, and many a
+waif and stray to seek shelter from the troublous life of the open
+ocean.
+
+You will perhaps find it difficult to believe that in this rock-bound
+basin there can be millions of living creatures hidden away among the
+fine feathery weeds; yet so it is. Not that they are always the same. At
+one time it may be the home of myriads of infant crabs, not an eighth of
+an inch long, at another of baby sea-urchins only visible to the naked
+eye as minute spots in the water, at another of young jelly-fish growing
+on their tiny stalks, and splitting off one by one as transparent bells
+to float away with the rising tide. Or it may be that the whelk has
+chosen this quiet nook to deposit her leathery eggs; or young barnacles,
+periwinkles, and limpets are growing up among the green and brown
+tangles, while the far-sailing velella and the stay-at-home sea-squirts,
+together with a variety of other sea-animals, find a nursery and shelter
+in their youth in this quiet harbour of rest.
+
+And besides these casual visitors there are numberless creatures which
+have lived and multiplied there, ever since I first visited the pool.
+Tender red, olive-coloured, and green seaweeds, stony corallines, and
+acorn-barnacles lining the floor, sea-anemones clinging to the sides,
+sponges tiny and many-coloured hiding under the ledges, and limpets and
+mussels wedged in the cracks. These can be easily seen with the naked
+eye, but they are not the most numerous inhabitants; for these we must
+search with a magnifying-glass, which will reveal to us wonderful
+fairy-forms, delicate crystal vases with tiny creatures in them whose
+transparent lashes make whirlpools in the water, living crystal bells so
+tiny that whole branches of them look only like a fringe of hair, jelly
+globes rising and falling in the water, patches of living jelly
+clinging to the rocky sides of the pool, and a hundred other forms, some
+so minute that you must examine the fine sand in which they lie under a
+powerful microscope before you can even guess that they are there.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 63.
+
+Group of seaweeds (natural size).
+
+1, _Ulva Linza._ 2, _Sphacelaria filicina._ 3, _Polysiphonia urceolata._
+4, _Corallina officinalis._]
+
+So it has proved a rich hunting-ground, where summer and winter, spring
+and autumn, I find some form to put under my magic glass. There I can
+watch it for weeks growing and multiplying under my care; moved only
+from the aquarium, where I keep it supplied with healthy sea-water, to
+the tiny transparent trough in which I place it for a few hours to see
+the changes it has undergone. I could tell you endless tales of
+transformations in these tiny lives, but I want to-day to show you a
+few of my friends, most of which I brought yesterday fresh from the
+pool, and have prepared for you to examine.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 64.
+
+_Ulva lactuca_, a green seaweed, greatly magnified to show structure.
+(After Oersted.)
+
+_s_, Spores in the cells. _ss_, Spores swimming out. _h_, Holes through
+which spores have escaped.]
+
+Let us begin with seaweeds. I have said that there are three leading
+colours in my pool--green, olive, and red--and these tints mark roughly
+three kinds of weed, though they occur in an endless variety of shapes.
+Here is a piece of the beautiful pale green seaweed, called the Laver or
+Sea-lettuce, _Ulva Linza_ (1, Fig. 63), which grows in long ribbons in a
+sunny nook in the water. I have placed under the first microscope a
+piece of this weed which is just sending out young seaweeds in the shape
+of tiny cells, with lashes very like those we saw coming from the
+moss-flower, and I have pressed them in the position in which they would
+naturally leave the plant (_ss_, Fig. 64.).[1] You will also see on this
+slide several cells in which these tiny spores _s_ are forming, ready to
+burst out and swim; for this green weed is merely a collection of cells,
+like the single-celled plants on land. Each cell can work as a separate
+plant; it feeds, grows, and can send out its own young spores.
+
+ [1] The slice given in Fig. 64 is from a broader-leaved form,
+ _U. lactuca_, because this species, being composed of only one
+ layer of cells, is better seen. _Ulva linza_ is composed of two
+ layers of cells.
+
+This deep olive-green feathery weed (2, Fig. 63), of which a piece is
+magnified under the next microscope (2, Fig. 65), is very different. It
+is a higher plant, and works harder for its living, using the darker
+rays of sunlight which penetrate into shady parts of the pool. So it
+comes to pass that its cells divide the work. Those of the feathery
+threads make the food, while others, growing on short stalks on the
+shafts of the feather make and send out the young spores.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 65.
+
+Three seaweeds of Fig. 63 much magnified to show fruits. (Harvey.)
+
+2, _Sphacelaria filicina._ 3, _Polysiphonia urceolata._ 4, _Corallina
+officinalis._]
+
+Lastly, the lovely red threadlike weeds, such as this _Polysiphonia
+urceolata_ (3, Fig. 63), carry actual urns on their stems like those of
+mosses. In fact, the history of these urns (see No. 3, Fig. 65) is much
+the same in the two classes of plants, only that instead of the urn
+being pushed up on a thin stalk as in the moss, it remains on the
+seaweed close down to the stem, when it grows out of the plant-egg, and
+the tiny plant is shut in till the spores are ready to swim out.
+
+The stony corallines (4, Figs. 63 and 65), which build so much carbonate
+of lime into their stems, are near relations of the red seaweeds. There
+are plenty of them in my pool. Some of them, of a deep purple colour,
+grow upright in stiff groups about three or four inches high; and
+others, which form crusts over the stones and weeds, are a pale rose
+colour; but both kinds, when the plant dies, leaving the stony skeleton
+(1, Fig. 66), are a pure white, and used to be mistaken for corals. They
+belong to the same order of plants as the red weeds, which all live in
+shady nooks in the pools, and are the highest of their race.
+
+My pool is full of different forms of these four weeds. The green
+ribbons float on the surface rooted to the sides of the pool and, as the
+sun shines upon it, the glittering bubbles rising from them show that
+they are working up food out of the air in the water, and giving off
+oxygen. The brown weeds lie chiefly under the shelves of rocks, for they
+can manage with less sunlight, and use the darker rays which pass by the
+green weeds; and last of all, the red weeds and corallines, small and
+delicate in form, line the bottom of the pool in its darkest nooks.
+
+And now if I hand round two specimens--one a coralline, and the other
+something you do not yet know--I am sure you will say at first sight
+that they belong to the same family, and, in fact, if you buy at the
+seaside a group of seaweeds gummed on paper, you will most likely get
+both these among them. Yet the truth is, that while the coralline (1,
+Fig. 66) is a plant, the other specimen (2) which is called _Sertularia
+filicula_, is an animal.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 66.
+
+Coralline and Sertularia, to show likeness between the animal Sertularia
+and the plant Coralline.
+
+1, _Corallina officinalis._ 2, _Sertularia filicula._]
+
+This special sertularian grows upright in my pool on stones or often on
+seaweeds, but I have here (Fig. 67) another and much smaller one which
+lives literally in millions hanging its cups downwards. I find it not
+only under the narrow ledges of the pool sheltered by the seaweed, but
+forming a fringe along all the rocks on each side of the cove near to
+low-water mark, and for a long time I passed it by thinking it was of no
+interest. But I have long since given up thinking this of anything,
+especially in my pool, for my magic glass has taught me that there is
+not even a living speck which does not open out into something
+marvellous and beautiful. So I chipped off a small piece of rock and
+brought the fringe home, and found, when I hung it up in clear sea water
+as I have done over this glass trough (Fig. 67) and looked at it through
+the lens, that each thread of the dense fringe, in itself not a quarter
+of an inch deep, turns out to be a tiny sertularian with at least twenty
+mouths. You can see this with your pocket lens even as it hangs here,
+and when you have examined it you can by and by take off one thread and
+put it carefully in the trough. I promise you a sight of the most
+beautiful little beings which exist in nature.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 67.
+
+_Sertularia tenella_, hanging from a splint of rock over a water trough.
+Also piece enlarged to show the animal protruding.]
+
+Come and look at it after the lecture. It is a horny branched stem with
+a double row of tiny cups all along each side (see Fig. 67). Out of
+these cups there appear from time to time sixteen minute transparent
+tentacles as fine as spun glass, which wave about in the water. If you
+shake the glass a little, in an instant each crystal star vanishes into
+its cup, to come out again a few minutes later; so that now here, now
+there, the delicate animal-flowers spread out on each side of the stem,
+and the tree is covered with moving beings. These tentacles are feelers,
+which lash food into a mouth and stomach in each cup, where it is
+digested and passed, through a hole in the bottom, along a jelly thread
+which runs down the stem and joins all the mouths together. In this way
+the food is distributed all over the tree, which is, in fact, one animal
+with many feeding-cups. Some day I will show you one of these cups with
+the tentacles stretched out and mounted on a slide, so that you can
+examine a tentacle with a very strong magnifying power. You will then
+see that it is dotted over with cells, in which are coiled fine
+threads. The animal uses these threads to paralyse the creatures on
+which it feeds, for at the base of each thread there is a poison gland.
+
+In the larger Sertularia (2, Fig. 66) the whole branched tree is
+connected by jelly threads running through the stem, and all the
+thousands of mouths are spread out in the water. One large form called
+the sea-fir _Sertularia cupressina_ grows sometimes three feet high, and
+bears as many as a hundred thousand cups, with living mouths, on its
+branches.
+
+The next of my minute friends I can only show to the class in a diagram,
+but you will see it under the fourth microscope by and by. I had great
+trouble in finding it yesterday, though I knew its haunts upon the green
+weed, for it is so minute and transparent that even when the weed is in
+a trough a magnifying-glass will scarcely detect it. And I must warn you
+that if you want to know any of the minute creatures we are studying,
+you must visit one place constantly. You may in a casual way find many
+of them on seaweed, or in the damp ooze and mud, but it will be by
+chance only; to look for them with any certainty you must take trouble
+in making their acquaintance.
+
+Turning then to the diagram (Fig. 68) I will describe it as I hope you
+will see it under the microscope--a curious tiny, perfectly transparent
+open-mouthed vase standing upright on the weed, and having an equally
+transparent being rising up in it and waving its tiny lashes in the
+water. This is really all one animal, the vase _hc_ being the horny
+covering or carapace of the body, which last stands up like a tube in
+the centre. If you watch carefully, you may even see the minute atoms of
+food twisting round inside the tube until they are digested, after they
+have been swept in at the wide open mouth by the whirling lashes. You
+will see this more clearly if you put a little rice-flour, very minutely
+powdered and coloured by carmine, into the water; for you can trace
+these red atoms into some round spaces called _vacuoles_ which are
+dotted over the body of the animal, and are really globules of watery
+fluid in which the food is probably partly digested.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 68.
+
+_Thuricolla folliculata_ and _Chilomonas amygdalum_. (Saville Kent.)
+
+1, Thuricolla erect; 2, retracted; 3, dividing. 4, _Chilomonas
+amygdalum_. _hc_, Horny carapace. _cv_, Contractile vesicle. _v_,
+Closing valves.]
+
+You will notice, however, one round clear space (_cv_) into which they
+do not go, and after a time you will be able to observe that this round
+spot closes up or contracts very quickly, and then expands again very
+slowly. As it expands it fills with a clear fluid, and naturalists have
+not yet decided exactly what work it does. It may serve the animal
+either for breathing, or as a very simple heart, making the fluids
+circulate in the tube. The next interesting point about this little
+being is the way it retreats into its sheltering vase. Even while you
+are watching, it is quite likely it may all at once draw itself down to
+the bottom as in No. 2, and folding down the valves _v_, _v_ of horny
+teeth which grow on each side, shut itself in from some fancied danger.
+Another very curious point is that, besides sending forth young ones,
+these creatures multiply by dividing in two (see No. 3, Fig. 68), each
+one closing its own part of the vase into a new home.
+
+There are hundreds of these _Infusoria_, as they are called, in my pond,
+some with vases, some without, some fixed to weeds and stones, others
+swimming about freely. Even in the water-trough in which this Thuricolla
+stands, I saw several smaller forms, and the next microscope has a
+trough filled with the minutest form of all, called a Monad (No. 4, Fig.
+68). These are so small that 2000 of them would lie side by side in an
+inch; that is, if you could make them lie at all, for they are the most
+restless little beings, darting hither and thither, scarcely even
+halting except to turn back. And yet though there are so many of them,
+and as far as we know they have no organs of sight, they never run up
+against each other, but glide past more cleverly than any clear-sighted
+fish. These creatures are mostly to be found among decaying seaweed, and
+though they are so tiny, you can still see distinctly the clear space
+(_cv_) contracting and expanding within them.
+
+But if there are so many thousands of mouths to feed, on the tree-like
+_Sertulariae_ as well as in all these _Infusoria_, where does the food
+come from?
+
+Partly from the numerous atoms of decaying life all around, and the
+minute eggs of animals and spores of plants; but besides these, the pool
+is full of minute living plants--small jelly masses with solid coats of
+flint which are moulded into most lovely shapes. Plants formed of jelly
+and flint! You will think I am joking, but I am not. These plants,
+called _Diatoms_, which live both in salt and fresh water, are single
+cells feeding and growing just like those we took from the water-butt
+(Fig. 29, p. 78), only that instead of a soft covering they build up a
+flinty skeleton. They are so small, that many of them must be magnified
+to fifty times their real size before you can even see them distinctly.
+Yet the skeletons of these almost invisible plants are carved and
+chiselled in the most delicate patterns. I showed you a group of these
+in our lecture on magic glasses (p. 39), and now I have brought a few
+living ones that we may learn to know them. The diagram (Fig. 69) shows
+the chief forms you will see on the different slides.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 69.
+
+Living diatoms.
+
+_a_, _Cocconema lanceolatum_. _b_, _Bacillaria paradoxa_.
+_c_, _Gomphonema marinum_. _d_, _Diatoma hyalina_.]
+
+The first one, _Bacillaria paradoxa_ (_b_, Fig. 69), looks like a number
+of rods clinging one to another in a string, but each one of these is a
+single-celled plant with a jelly cell surrounding the flinty skeleton.
+You will see that they move to and fro over each other in the water.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 70.
+
+A diatom (_Diatoma vulgare_) growing.
+
+_a_, _b_, Flint skeleton inside the jelly-cell. _a_, _c_ and _d_, _b_,
+Two flint skeletons formed by new valves, _c_ and _d_, forming within
+the first skeleton.]
+
+The next two forms, _a_ and _c_, look much more like plants, for the
+cells arrange themselves on a jelly stem, which by and by disappears,
+leaving only the separate flint skeletons such as you see in Fig. 16.
+The last form, _d_, is something midway between the other forms, the
+separate cells hang on to each other and also on to a straight jelly
+stem.
+
+Another species of Diatoma (Fig. 70) called _Diatoma vulgare_, is a very
+simple and common form, and will help to explain how these plants grow.
+The two flinty valves _a_, _b_ inside the cell are not quite the same
+size; the older one _a_ is larger than the younger one _b_ and fits over
+it like the cover of a pill-box. As the plant grows, the cell enlarges
+and forms two more valves, one _c_ fitting into the cover _a_, so as to
+make a complete box _ac_, and a second, _d_, back to back with _c_,
+fitting into the valve _b_, and making another complete box _bd_. This
+goes on very rapidly, and in this plant each new cell separates as it is
+formed, and the free diatoms move about quite actively in the water.
+
+If you consider for a moment, you will see that, as the new valves
+always fit into the old ones, each must be smaller than the last, and so
+there comes a time when the valves have become too small to go on
+increasing. Then the plant must begin afresh. So the two halves of the
+last cell open, and throwing out their flinty skeletons, cover
+themselves with a thin jelly layer, and form a new cell which grows
+larger than any of the old ones. These, which are spore-cells, then form
+flinty valves inside, and the whole thing begins again.
+
+Now though the plants themselves die, or become the food of minute
+animals, the flinty skeletons are not destroyed, but go on accumulating
+in the waters of ponds, lakes, rivers, and seas, all over the world.
+Untold millions have no doubt crumbled to dust and gone back into the
+waters, but untold millions also have survived. The towns of Berlin in
+Europe and of Richmond in the United States are actually built upon
+ground called "infusorial earth," composed almost entirely of valves of
+these minute diatoms which have accumulated to a thickness of more than
+eighty feet! Those under Berlin are fresh-water forms, and must have
+lived in a lake, while those of Richmond belong to salt-water forms.
+Every inch of the ground under those cities represents thousands and
+thousands of living plants which flourished in ages long gone by, and
+were no larger than those you will see presently under the microscope.
+
+These are a very few of the microscopic inhabitants of my pond, but, as
+you will confuse them if I show you too many, we will conclude with two
+rather larger specimens, and examine them carefully. The first, called
+the Cydippe, is a lovely, transparent living ball, which I want to
+explain to you because it is so wondrously beautiful. The second, the
+Sea-mat or Flustra, looks like a crumpled drab-coloured seaweed, but is
+really composed of many thousands of grottos, the homes of tiny
+sea-animals.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 71.
+
+_Cydippe Pileus._
+
+1, Animal with tentacles _t_, bearing small tendrils _t'_. 2, Body of
+animal enlarged. _m_, Mouth. _c_, Digestive cavity. _s_, Sac into which
+the tentacles are withdrawn. _p_, Bands with comb-like plates. 3,
+Portion of a band enlarged to show the moving plates _p_.]
+
+Let us take the Cydippe first (1, Fig. 71). I have six here, each in a
+separate tumbler, and could have brought many more, for when I dipped my
+net in the pool yesterday such numbers were caught in it that I believe
+the retreating tide must just have left a shoal behind. Put a tumbler on
+the desk in front of you, and if the light falls well upon it you will
+see a transparent ball about the size of a large pea marked with eight
+bright bands, which begin at the lower end of the ball and reach nearly
+to the top, dividing the outside into sections like the ribs of a melon.
+The creature is so perfectly transparent that you can count all the
+eight bands.
+
+At the top of the ball is a slight bulge which is the mouth (_m_ 2, Fig.
+71), and from it, inside the ball, hangs a long bag or stomach, which
+opens below into a cavity c, from which two canals branch out, one on
+each side, and these divide again into four canals which go one into
+each of the tubes running down the bands. From this cavity the food,
+which is digested in the stomach, is carried by the canals all over the
+body. The smaller tubes which branch out of these canals cannot be seen
+clearly without a very strong lens, and the only other parts you can
+discern in this transparent ball are two long sacs on each side of the
+lower end. These are the tentacle sacs, in which are coiled up the
+tentacles, which we shall describe presently. Lastly, you can notice
+that the bands outside the globe are broader in the middle than at the
+ends, and are striped across by a number of ridges.
+
+In moving the tumblers the water has naturally been shaken, and the
+creature being alarmed will probably at first remain motionless. But
+very soon it will begin to play in the water, rising and falling, and
+swimming gracefully from side to side. Now you will notice a curious
+effect, for the bands will glitter and become tinged with prismatic
+colours, till, as it moves more and more rapidly these colours,
+reflected in the jelly, seem to tinge the whole ball with colours like
+those on a soap-bubble, while from the two sacs below come forth two
+long transparent threads like spun glass. At first these appear to be
+simple threads, but as they gradually open out to about four or five
+inches, smaller threads uncoil on each side of the line till there are
+about fifty on each line. These short _tendrils_ are never still for
+long; as the main threads wave to and fro, some of the shorter ones coil
+up and hang like tiny beads, then these uncoil and others roll up, so
+that these graceful floating lines are never two seconds alike.
+
+We do not really know their use. Sometimes the creature anchors itself
+by them, rising and falling as they stretch out or coil up; but more
+often they float idly behind it in the water. At first you would perhaps
+think that they served to drive the ball through the water, but this is
+done by a special apparatus. The cross ridges which we noticed on the
+bands are really flat comb-like plates (_p_, Fig. 71), of which there
+are about twenty or thirty on each band; and these vibrate very rapidly,
+so that two hundred or more paddles drive the tiny ball through the
+water. This is the cause of the prismatic colours; for iridescent tints
+are produced by the play of light upon the glittering plates, as they
+incessantly change their angle. Sometimes they move all at once,
+sometimes only a few at a time, and it is evident the creature controls
+them at will.
+
+This lovely fairy-like globe, with its long floating tentacles and
+rainbow tints, was for a long time classed with the jelly-fish; but it
+really is most nearly related to sea-anemones, as it has a true central
+cavity which acts as a stomach, and many other points in common with the
+_Actinozoa_. We cannot help wondering, as the little being glides hither
+and thither, whether it can see where it is going. It has nerves of a
+low kind which start from a little dark spot (_ng_), exactly at the
+south pole of the ball, and at that point a sense-organ of some kind
+exists, but what impression the creature gains from it of the world
+outside we cannot tell.
+
+I am afraid you may think it dull to turn from such a beautiful being as
+this, to the grey leaf which looks only like a dead dry seaweed; yet you
+will be wrong, for a more wonderful history attaches to this crumpled
+dead-looking leaf than to the lovely jelly-globe.
+
+First of all I will pass round pieces of the dry leaf (_r_, Fig. 72),
+and while you are getting them I will tell you where I found the living
+ones. Great masses of the Flustra, as it is called, line the bottom and
+sides of my pool. They grow in tufts, standing upright on the rock, and
+looking exactly like hard grey seaweeds, while there is nothing to lead
+you to suspect that they are anything else. Yesterday I chipped off very
+carefully a piece of rock with a tuft upon it, and have kept it since in
+a glass globe by itself with sea-water, for the little creatures living
+in this marine city require a very good supply of healthy water and air.
+I have called it a "marine city," and now I will tell you why. Take the
+piece in your hand and run your finger gently up and down it; you will
+glide quite comfortably from the lower to the higher part of the leaf,
+but when you come back you will feel your finger catch slightly on a
+rough surface. Your pocket lens will show why this is, for if you look
+through it at the surface of the leaf you will see it is not smooth, but
+composed of hundreds of tiny alcoves with arched tops; and on each side
+of these tops stand two short blunt spines (see 2, Fig. 72), making four
+in all, pointing upwards, so as partly to cover the alcove above. As
+your finger went up it glided over the spines, but on coming back it met
+their points. This is all you can see in the dead specimen; I must show
+you the rest by diagrams, and by and by under the microscope.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 72.
+
+The Sea-mat or Flustra (_Flustra foliacea._)
+
+1, Natural size. 2, Much magnified. _s_, Slit caused by drawing in of
+the animal _a_.]
+
+First, then, in the living specimen which I have here, those alcoves are
+not open as in the dead piece, but covered over with a transparent skin,
+in which, near the top of the alcove just where the curve begins, is a
+slit (_s_ 2, Fig. 72). Unfortunately the membrane covering this alcove
+is too dense for you to distinguish the parts within. Presently,
+however, if you are watching a piece of this living leaf in a flat
+water-cell under the microscope, you will see the slit slowly open, and
+begin to turn as it were inside out, exactly like the finger of a
+glove, which has been pushed in at the tip, gradually rises up when you
+put your finger inside it. As this goes on, a bundle of threads appears,
+at first closed like a bud, but gradually opening out into a crown of
+tentacles (_a_, Fig. 72), each one clothed with hairs. Then you will see
+that the slit was not exactly a slit after all, but the round edge where
+the sac was pushed in. Ah! you will say, you are now showing me a polyp
+like those on the sertularian tree. Not so fast, my friend; you have not
+yet studied what is still under the covering skin and hidden in the
+living animal. I have, however, prepared a slide with this membrane
+removed (see Fig. 73), and there you can observe the different parts,
+and learn that each one of these alcoves contains a complete animal, and
+not merely one among many mouths, like the polyp on the Sertularia.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 73.
+
+Diagram of the animal in the Flustra or Sea-mat.
+
+1, Animal protruding. 2, Animal retracted in the sheath. _sh_, Covering
+sheath. _s_, Slit. _t_, Tentacles. _m_, Mouth. _th_, Throat. _st_,
+Stomach. _i_, Intestine. _r_, Retractor muscle. _e_, Egg-forming parts.
+_g_, Nerve-ganglion.]
+
+Each of these little beings (_a_, Fig 72) living in its alcove has a
+mouth, throat, stomach, intestine, muscles, and nerves starting from the
+ganglion of nervous matter, besides all that is necessary for producing
+eggs and sending forth young ones. You can trace all these under the
+microscope (see 2, Fig. 73) as the creature lies curiously doubled up in
+its bed, with its body bent in a loop; the intestine _i_, out of which
+the refuse food passes, coming back close up to the slit. When it is at
+rest, the top of the sac in which it lies is pulled in by the retractor
+muscle _r_, and looks, as I have said, like the finger of a glove with
+the top pushed in. When it wishes to feed, this top is drawn out by
+muscles running round the sac, and the tentacles open and wave in the
+water (1, Fig. 73).
+
+Look now at the alcoves, the homes of these animals; see how tiny they
+are and how closely they fit together. Mr. Gosse, the naturalist, has
+reckoned that there are 6720 alcoves in a square inch; then if you turn
+the leaf over you will see that there is another set, fixed back to back
+with these, on the other side, making in all 13,440 alcoves. Now a
+moderate-sized leaf of flustra measures about three square inches,
+taking all the rounded lobes into account, so you will see we get 40,320
+as a rough estimate of the number of beings on this one leaf. But if you
+look at this tuft I have brought, you will find it is composed of twelve
+such leaves, and this after all is a very small part of the mass growing
+round my pool. Was I wrong, then, when I said that my miniature ocean
+contains as many millions of beings as there are stars in the heavens?
+
+You will want to know how these leaves grew, and it is in this way.
+First a little free swimming animal, a mere living sac provided with
+lashes, settles down and grows into one little horny alcove, with its
+live creature inside, which in time sends off from it three to five
+buds, forming alcoves all round the top and sides of the first one,
+growing on to it. These again bud out, and you can thus easily
+understand that, in this way, in time a good-sized leaf is formed.
+Meanwhile the creatures also send forth new swimming cells, which settle
+down near to begin new leaves, and thus a tuft is formed; and long after
+the beings in earlier parts of the leaf have died and left their alcoves
+empty, those round the margin are still alive and spreading.
+
+With this history we must stop for to-day, and I expect it will be many
+weeks before you have thoroughly examined the specimens of each kind
+which I have put in the aquarium. If you can trace the spore-cells and
+urns in the seaweeds, observe the polyps in the Sertularia, and count
+the number of mouths on a branch of my animal fringe (_Sertularia
+tenella_); if you make acquaintance with the Thuricolla in its vase, and
+are fortunate enough to see one divide in two; if you learn to know some
+of the beautiful forms of diatoms, and can picture to yourselves the
+life of the tiny inhabitants of the Flustra; then you will have used
+your microscope with some effect, and be prepared for an expedition to
+my pool, where we will go together some day to seek new treasures.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+THE DARTMOOR PONIES,
+
+OR
+
+THE WANDERINGS OF THE HORSE TRIBE
+
+
+[Illustration]
+
+Put away the telescopes and microscopes to-day, boys, the holidays are
+close at hand, and we will take a rest from peeping and peering till we
+come back in the autumn laden with specimens for the microscope, while
+the rapidly darkening evenings will tempt us again on to the lawn
+star-gazing. On this our last lecture-day I want you to take a journey
+with me which I took in imagination a few days ago, as I lay on my back
+on the sunny moor and watched the Dartmoor ponies.
+
+It was a calm misty morning one day last week, giving promise of a
+bright and sunny day, when I started off for a long walk across the moor
+to visit the famous stone-circles, many of which are to be found not
+far off the track, called Abbot's Way, leading from Buckfast Abbey, on
+the Dart, to the Abbey of Tavistock, on the Tavy.
+
+My mind was full of the olden times as I pictured to myself how, seven
+hundred years or more ago, some Benedictine monk from Tavistock Abbey,
+in his black robe and cowl, paced this narrow path on his way to his
+Cistercian brethren at Buckfast, meeting some of them on his road as
+they wandered over the desolate moor in their white robes and black
+scapularies in search of stray sheep. For the Cistercians were shepherds
+and wool-weavers, while the Benedictines devoted themselves to learning,
+and the track of about twenty-five miles from one abbey to the other,
+which still remains, was worn by the members of the two communities and
+their dependents, the only variety in whose lives consisted probably in
+these occasional visits one to the other.
+
+Yet even these monks belonged to modern times compared to the ancient
+Britons who raised the stone-circles, and buried their dead in the
+barrows scattered here and there over the moor; and my mind drifted back
+to the days when, long before that pathway was worn, men clad in the
+skins of beasts hunted wild animals over the ground on which I was
+treading, and lived in caves and holes of the ground.
+
+I wondered, as I thought of them, whether the cultured monks and the
+uncivilised Britons delighted as much in the rugged scenery of the moor
+as I did that morning. For many miles in front of me the moor stretched
+out wild and treeless; the sun was shining brightly upon the mass of
+yellow furze and deep-red heather, drawing up the moisture from the
+ground, and causing a kind of watery haze to shimmer over the landscape;
+while the early mist was rising off the _tors_, or hill-tops, in the
+distance, curling in fanciful wreaths around the rugged and stony
+summits, as it dispersed gradually in the increasing heat of the day.
+
+The cattle which were scattered in groups here and there feeding on the
+dewy grass were enjoying the happiest time of the year. The moor, which
+in winter affords them scarcely a bare subsistence, is now richly
+covered with fresh young grass, and the sturdy oxen fed solemnly and
+deliberately, while the wild Dartmoor ponies and their colts scampered
+joyously along, shaking their manes and long flowing tails, and neighing
+to each other as they went; or clustered together on some verdant spot,
+where the colts teased and bit each other for fun, as they gambolled
+round their mothers.
+
+It was a pleasure, there on the open moor, with the lark soaring
+overhead, and the butterflies and bees hovering among the sweet-smelling
+furze blossoms, to see horses free and joyous, with no thought of bit or
+bridle, harness or saddle, whose hoofs had never been handled by the
+shoeing-smith, nor their coats touched with the singeing iron. Those
+little colts, with their thick heads, shaggy coats, and flowing tails,
+will have at least two years more freedom before they know what it is to
+be driven or beaten. Only once a year are they gathered together,
+claimed by their owners and branded with an initial, and then left
+again to wander where they will. True, it is a freedom which sometimes
+has its drawbacks, for if the winter is severe the only food they can
+get will be the furze-tops, off which they scrape the snow with their
+feet; yet it is very precious in itself, for they can gallop when and
+where they choose, with head erect, sniffing at the wind and crying to
+each other for the very joy of life.
+
+Now as I strolled across the moor and watched their gambols, thinking
+how like free wild animals they seemed, my thoughts roamed far away, and
+I saw in imagination scenes where other untamed animals of the horse
+tribe are living unfettered all their lives long.
+
+First there rose before my mind the level grass-covered pampas of South
+America, where wild horses share the boundless plains with troops of the
+rhea, or American ostrich, and wander, each horse with as many mares as
+he can collect, in companies of hundreds or even thousands in a troop.
+These horses are now truly wild, and live freely from youth to age,
+unless they are unfortunate enough to be caught in the more inhabited
+regions by the lasso of the hunter. In the broad pampas, the home of
+herds of wild cattle, they dread nothing. There, as they roam with one
+bold stallion as their leader, even beasts of prey hesitate to approach
+them, for, when they form into a dense mass with the mothers and young
+in their centre, their heels deal blows which even the fierce jaguar
+does not care to encounter, and they trample their enemy to death in a
+very short time. Yet these are not the original wild horses we are
+seeking, they are the descendants of tame animals, brought from Europe
+by the Spaniards to Buenos Ayres in 1535, whose descendants have
+regained their freedom on the boundless pampas and prairies.
+
+As I was picturing them careering over the plains, another scene
+presented itself and took their place. Now I no longer saw around me
+tall pampas-grass with the long necks of the rheas appearing above it,
+for I was on the edge of a dreary scantily covered plain between the
+Aral Sea and the Balkash Lake in Tartary. To the south lies a barren
+sandy desert, to the north the fertile plains of the Kirghiz steppes,
+where the Tartar feeds his flocks, and herds of antelopes gallop over
+the fresh green pasture; and between these is a kind of no-man's land,
+where low scanty shrubs and stunted grass seemed to promise but a poor
+feeding-ground.
+
+Yet here the small long-legged but powerful "Tarpans," the wild horses
+of the treeless plains of Russia and Tartary, were picking their morning
+meal. Sturdy wicked little fellows they are, with their shaggy
+light-brown coats, short wiry manes, erect ears, and fiery watchful
+eyes. They might well be supposed to be true wild horses, whose
+ancestors had never been tamed by man; and yet it is more probable that
+even they escaped in early times from the Tartars, and have held their
+own ever since, over the grassy steppes of Russia and on the confines of
+the plains of Tartary. Sometimes they live almost alone, especially on
+the barren wastes where they have been seen in winter, scraping the snow
+off the herbage as our ponies do on Dartmoor. At other times, as in the
+south of Russia, where they wander between the Dnieper and the Don, they
+gather in vast herds and live a free life, not fearing even the wolves,
+which they beat to the ground with their hoofs. From one green oasis to
+another they travel over miles of ground.
+
+ "A thousand horse--and none to ride!
+ With flowing tail, and flying mane,
+ Wide nostrils--never stretch'd by pain,
+ Mouths bloodless to the bit or rein,
+ And feet that iron never shod,
+ And flanks unscarr'd by spur or rod.
+ A thousand horse, the wild, the free,
+ Like waves that follow o'er the sea."[1]
+
+ [1] Byron's _Mazeppa_.
+
+As I followed them in their course I fancied I saw troops of yet another
+animal of the horse tribe, the "Kulan," or _Equus hemionus_, which is a
+kind of half horse, half ass (Fig. 74), living on the Kirghiz steppes of
+Tartary and spreading far beyond the range of the Tarpan into Tibet.
+Here at last we have a truly wild animal, never probably brought into
+subjection by man. The number of names he possesses shows how widely he
+has spread. The Tartars call him "Kulan," the Tibetans "Kiang," while
+the Mongolians give him the unpronounceable name of "Dschiggetai." He
+will not submit to any of them, but if caught and confined soon breaks
+away again to his old life, a "free and fetterless creature."
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 74.
+
+_Equus hemionus_, "Kiang" or "Kulan," the Horse-ass of Tartary and
+Tibet. (Brehm.)]
+
+No one has ever yet settled the question whether he is a horse or an
+ass, probably because he represents an animal truly between the two.
+His head is graceful, his body light, his legs slender and fleet, yet
+his ears are long and ass-like; he has narrow hoofs, and a tail with a
+tuft at the end like all the ass tribe; his colour is a yellow brown,
+and he has a short dark mane and a long dark stripe down his back as a
+donkey has, though this last character you may also see in many of our
+Devonshire ponies. Living often on the high plateaux, sometimes as much
+as 1500 feet above the sea, this "child of the steppes" travels in large
+companies even as far as the rich meadows of Central Asia; in summer
+wandering in green pastures, and in winter seeking the hunger-steppes
+where sturdy plants grow. And when autumn comes the young steeds go off
+alone to the mountain heights to survey the country around and call
+wildly for mates, whom, when found, they will keep close to them through
+all the next year, even though they mingle with thousands of others.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 75.
+
+Przevalsky's Wild Horse, the "Kertag" or "Statur."]
+
+Till about ten years ago the _Equus hemionus_ was the only truly wild
+horse known, but in the winter of 1879-80 the Russian traveller
+Przevalsky brought back from Central Asia a much more horse-like animal,
+called by the Tartars "Kertag" and by the Mongols "Statur." It is a
+clumsy, thick-set, whitish-gray creature with strong legs and a large,
+heavy, reddish-coloured head; its legs have a red tint down to the
+knees, beyond which they are blackish down to the hoofs. But the ears
+are small, and it has the broad hoofs of the true horse, and warts on
+his hind legs, which no animal of the ass tribe has. This horse, like
+the Kiang, travels in small troops of from five to fifteen, led through
+the wildest parts of the Dsungarian desert, between the Altai and
+Tianschan Mountains, by an old stallion. They are extremely shy, and
+see, hear, and smell very quickly, so that they are off like lightning
+whenever anything approaches them.
+
+So having travelled over America, Europe, and Asia, was my quest ended?
+No; for from the dreary Asiatic deserts my thoughts wandered to a far
+warmer and more fertile land, where between the Blue Nile and the Red
+Sea rise the lofty highlands of Abyssinia, among which the African wild
+ass (_Asinus taeniopus_), the probable ancestor of our donkeys, feeds in
+troops on the rich grasses of the slopes, and then onwards to the bank
+of a river in Central Africa where on the edge of a forest, with rich
+pastures beyond, elephants and rhinoceroses, antelopes and buffaloes,
+lions and hyaenas, creep down in the cool of the evening to slake their
+thirst in the flowing stream. There I saw the herds of Zebras in all
+their striped beauty coming down from the mountain regions to the north,
+and mingling with the darker-coloured but graceful quaggas from the
+southern plains, and I half-grieved at the thought how these untamed and
+free rovers are being slowly but surely surrounded by man closing in
+upon them on every side.
+
+I might now have travelled still farther in search of the Onager, or
+wild ass of the Asiatic and Indian deserts, but at this point a more
+interesting and far wider question presented itself, as I flung myself
+down on the moor to ponder over the early history of all these tribes.
+
+Where have they all come from? Where shall we look for the first
+ancestors of these wild and graceful animals? For the answer to this
+question I had to travel back to America, to those Western United States
+where Professor Marsh has made such grand discoveries in horse history.
+For there, in the very country where horses were supposed never to have
+been before the Spaniards brought them a few centuries ago, we have now
+found the true birthplace of the equine race.
+
+Come back with me to a time so remote that we cannot measure it even by
+hundreds of thousands of years, and let us visit the territories of Utah
+and Wyoming. Those highlands were very different then from what they are
+now. Just risen out of the seas of the Cretaceous Period, they were then
+clothed with dense forests of palms, tree-ferns, and screw-pines,
+magnolias and laurels, interspersed with wide-spreading lakes, on the
+margins of which strange and curious animals fed and flourished. There
+were large beasts with teeth like the tapir and the bear, and feet like
+the elephant; and others far more dangerous, half bear, half hyaena,
+prowling around to attack the clumsy paleotherium or the anoplotherium,
+something between a rhinoceros and a horse, which grazed by the
+waterside, while graceful antelopes fed on the rich grass. And among
+these were some little animals no bigger than foxes, with four toes and
+a splint for the fifth, on their front feet, and three toes on the hind
+ones.
+
+These clumsy little animals, whose bones have been found in the rocks of
+Utah and Wyoming, have been called _Eohippus_, or horses of the dawn,
+by naturalists. They were animals with real toes, yet their bones and
+teeth show that they belonged to the horse tribe, and already the fifth
+toe common to most other toed animals was beginning to disappear.
+
+This was in the Eocene period, and before it passed away with its
+screw-pines and tree-ferns, another rather larger animal, called the
+_Orohippus_, had taken the place of the small one, and he had only four
+toes on his front feet. The splint had disappeared, and as time went on
+still other animals followed, always with fewer toes, while they gained
+slender fleet legs, together with an increase in size and in
+gracefulness. First one as large as a sheep (_Mesohippus_) had only
+three toes and a splint. Then the splint again disappeared, and one
+large and two dwindling toes only remained, till finally these two
+became mere splints, leaving one large toe or hoof with almost
+imperceptible splints, which may be seen on the fetlock of a horse's
+skeleton.
+
+The diagram (Fig 76) shows these splints in the horse's or ass's foot of
+to-day. For you must notice that a horse's foot really begins at the
+point _w_ which we call his knee in the front legs, and at his hock _h_
+in the hind legs. His true knee _k_ and elbow _e_ are close up to the
+body. What we call his foot or hoof is really the end of the strong,
+broad, middle toe _t_ covered with a hoof, and farther up his foot at
+_s_ and _s_ we can feel two small splints, which are remains of two
+other toes.
+
+Meanwhile during these long succeeding ages while the foot was
+lengthening out into a slender limb the animals became larger, more
+powerful, and more swift, the neck and head became longer and more
+graceful, the brain-case larger in front and the teeth decreased in
+number, so that there is now a large gap between the biting teeth _i_
+and the grinding teeth _g_ of a horse. Their slender limbs too became
+more flexible and fit for running and galloping, till we find the whole
+skeleton the same in shape, though not in size, as in our own horses and
+asses now.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 76.
+
+Skeleton of Horse or Ass.
+
+_i_, Incisor teeth. _g_, Grinding teeth, with the gap between the two as
+in all grass-feeders. _k_, Knee. _h_, Hock or heel. _f_, Foot. _s_,
+Splints or remains of the two lost toes. _e_, Elbow. _w_, Wrist. _ha_,
+Hand-bone. _t_, middle toe of three joints, 1, 2, 3 forming the hoof.]
+
+They did not, however, during all this time remain confined to America,
+for, from the time when they arrived at an animal called _Miohippus_, or
+lesser horse, which came after the Mesohippus and had only three toes
+on each foot, we find their remains in Europe, where they lived in
+company with the giraffes, opossums, and monkeys which roamed over these
+parts in those ancient times. Then a little later we find them in Africa
+and India; so that the horse tribe, represented by creatures about as
+large as donkeys, had spread far and wide over the world.
+
+And now, curiously enough, they began to forsake, or to die out in, the
+land of their birth. Why they did so we do not know; but while in the
+old world as asses, quaggas, and zebras, and probably horses, they
+flourished in Asia, Europe, and Africa, they certainly died out in
+America, so that ages afterwards, when that land was discovered, no
+animal of the horse tribe was found in it.
+
+And the true horse, where did he arise? Born and bred probably in
+Central Asia from some animal like the "Kulan," or the "Kertag," he
+proved too useful to savage tribes to be allowed his freedom, and it is
+doubtful whether in any part of the world he escaped subjection. In our
+own country he probably roamed as a wild animal till the savages, who
+fed upon him, learned in time to put him to work; and when the Romans
+came they found the Britons with fine and well-trained horses.
+
+Yet though tamed and made to know his master he has, as we have seen,
+broken loose again in almost all parts of the world--in America on the
+prairies and pampas, in Europe and Asia on the steppes, and in Australia
+in the bush. And even in Great Britain, where so few patches of
+uncultivated land still remain, the young colts of Dartmoor, Exmoor,
+and Shetland, though born of domesticated mothers, seem to assert their
+descent from wild and free ancestors as they throw out their heels and
+toss up their heads with a shrill neigh, and fly against the wind with
+streaming manes and outstretched tails as the Kulan, the Tarpan, and the
+Zebra do in the wild desert or grassy plain.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+THE MAGICIAN'S DREAM OF ANCIENT DAYS.
+
+
+[Illustration]
+
+The magician sat in his armchair in the one little room in the house
+which was his, and his only, besides the observatory. And a strange room
+it was. The walls were hung with skulls and bones of men and animals,
+with swords, daggers, and shields, coats of mail, and bronze
+spear-heads. The drawers, many of which stood open, contained
+flint-stones chipped and worn, arrowheads of stone, jade hatchets
+beautifully polished, bronze buckles and iron armlets; while scattered
+among these were pieces of broken pottery, some rough and only
+half-baked, others beautifully finished, as the Romans knew how to
+finish them. Rough needles made of bone lay beside bronze knives with
+richly-ornamented handles and, most precious of all, on the table by the
+magician's side lay a reindeer antler, on which was roughly carved the
+figure of the reindeer itself.
+
+He had been enjoying a six weeks' holiday, and he had employed it in
+visiting some of the bone caves of Europe to learn about the men who
+lived in them long, long ago. He had been to the south of France to see
+the famous caves of the Dordogne, to Belgium to the caves of Engis and
+Engihoul, to the Hartz Mountains and to Hungary. Then hastening home he
+had visited the chief English caves in Yorkshire, Wales, and Devonshire.
+
+Now that he had returned to his college, his mind was so full of facts,
+that he felt perplexed how to lay before his class the wonderful story
+of the life of man before history began. And as the day was hot, and the
+very breeze which played around him made him feel languid and sleepy, he
+fell into a reverie--a waking dream.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+First the room faded from his sight, then the trim villages disappeared;
+the homesteads, the corn-fields, the grazing cattle, all were gone, and
+he saw the whole of England covered with thick forests and rough
+uncultivated land. From the mountains in the north, glaciers were to be
+seen creeping down the valleys between dense masses of fir and oak, pine
+and birch; while the wild horse, the bison, and the Irish elk were
+feeding on the plains. As he looked southward and eastward he saw that
+the sea no longer washed the shores, for the English and Irish Channels
+were not yet scooped out. The British Isles were still part of the
+continent of Europe, so that animals could migrate overland from the
+far south, up to what is now England, Scotland, and Ireland. Many of
+these animals, too, were very different from any now living in the
+country, for in the large rivers of England he saw the hippopotamus
+playing with her calf, while elephants and rhinoceroses were drinking at
+the water's edge. Yet these strange creatures did not have all the
+country to themselves--wolves, bears, and foxes prowled in the woods,
+large beavers built their dams across the streams, and here and there
+over the country human beings were living in caves and holes of the
+earth.
+
+It was these men chiefly who attracted the magician's attention, and
+being curious to know how they lived, he turned towards a cave, at the
+mouth of which was a group of naked children who were knocking pieces of
+flint together, trying to strike off splinters and make rough flint
+tools, such as they saw their fathers use. Not far off from them a woman
+with a wild beast's skin round her waist was gathering firewood, another
+was grubbing up roots, and another, venturing a little way into the
+forest, was searching for honey in the hollows of the tree trunks.
+
+All at once in the dusk of the evening a low growl and a frightened cry
+were heard, and the women rushed towards the cave as they saw near the
+edge of the forest a huge tiger with sabre-shaped teeth struggling with
+a powerful stag. In vain the deer tried to stamp on his savage foe or to
+wound him with his antlers; the strong teeth of the tiger had penetrated
+his throat, and they fell struggling together as the stag uttered his
+death-cry. Just at that moment loud shouts were heard in the forest, and
+the frightened women knew that help was near.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 77.
+
+Palaeolithic times.]
+
+One after another, several men, clothed in skins hung over one shoulder
+and secured round the waist, rushed out of the thicket, their hair
+streaming in the wind, and ran towards the tiger. They held in their
+hands strange weapons made of rough pointed flints fastened into handles
+by thongs of skin, and as the tiger turned upon them with a cry of rage
+they met him with a rapid shower of blows. The fight raged fiercely,
+for the beast was strong and the weapons of the men were rude, but the
+tiger lay dead at last by the side of his victim. His skin and teeth
+were the reward of the hunters, and the stag he had killed became their
+prey.
+
+How skilfully they hacked it to pieces with their stone axes, and then
+loading it upon their shoulders set off up the hill towards the cave,
+where they were welcomed with shouts of joy by the women and children!
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 78.
+
+Palaeolithic relics.
+
+1, Bone needle, from a cave at La Madeleine, 1/2 size. 2, Tooth of
+Machairodus or sabre-toothed tiger, from Kent's Cavern, 1/2 size. 3,
+Rough stone implement, from Kent's Cavern, 1/4 size.]
+
+Then began the feast. First fires were kindled slowly and with
+difficulty by rubbing a sharp-pointed stick in a groove of softer wood
+till the wood-dust burst into flame; then a huge pile was lighted at the
+mouth of the cave to cook the food and keep off wild beasts. How the
+food was cooked the magician could not see, but he guessed that the
+flesh was cut off the bones and thrust in the glowing embers, and he
+watched the men afterwards splitting open the uncooked bones to suck out
+the raw marrow which savages love.
+
+After the feast was over he noticed how they left these split bones
+scattered upon the floor of the cave mingling with the sabre-shaped
+teeth of the tiger, and this reminded him of the bones of the stag and
+the tiger's tooth which he had found in Kent's Cavern in Devonshire only
+a few days before.
+
+By this time the men had lain down to sleep, and in the darkness strange
+cries were heard from the forest. The roar of the lion, mingled with the
+howling of the wolves and the shrill laugh of the hyaenas, told that they
+had come down to feed on the remains of the tiger. But none of these
+animals ventured near the glowing fire at the mouth of the cavern,
+behind which the men slept in security till the sun was high in the
+heavens. Then all was astir again, for weapons had been broken in the
+fight, and some of the men sitting on the ground outside the cave placed
+one flint between their knees, and striking another sharply against it
+drove off splinters, leaving a pointed end and cutting edge. They
+spoiled many before they made one to their liking, and the entrance to
+the cave was strewn with splintered fragments and spoilt flints, but at
+last several useful stones were ready. Meanwhile another man, taking his
+rude stone axe, set to work to hew branches from the trees to form
+handles, while another, choosing a piece remaining of the body of the
+stag, tore a sinew from the thigh, and threading it through the large
+eye of the bone needle, stitched the tiger's skin roughly together into
+a garment.
+
+"_This, then_," said the magician to himself, "_is how ancient man lived
+in the summer-time, but how would he fare when winter came?_" As he
+mused the scene gradually changed. The glaciers crept far lower down
+the valleys, and the hills, and even the lower ground, lay thick in
+snow. The hippopotamus had wandered away southward to warmer climes, as
+animals now migrate over the continent of America in winter, and with
+him had gone the lion, the southern elephant, and other summer visitors.
+In their place large herds of reindeer and shaggy oxen had come down
+from the north and were spread over the plains, scraping away the snow
+with their feet to feed on the grass beneath. The mammoth, too, or hairy
+elephant, of the same extinct species as those which have been found
+frozen in solid ice under a sandbank in Siberia, had come down to feed,
+accompanied by the woolly rhinoceros; and scattered over the hills were
+the curious horned musk-sheep, which have long ago disappeared off the
+face of the earth. Still, bitterly cold as it was, the hunter clad in
+his wild-beast skin came out from time to time to chase the mammoth, the
+reindeer, and the oxen for food, and cut wood in the forest to feed the
+cavern fires.
+
+This time the magician's thoughts wandered down to the south-west of
+France, where, on the banks of a river in that part now called the
+Dordogne, a number of caves not far from each other formed the home of
+savage man. Here he saw many new things, for the men used arrows of
+deer-horn and of wood pointed with flint, and with these they shot the
+birds, which were hovering near in hopes of finding food during the
+bitter weather. By the side of the river a man was throwing a small dart
+of deer-horn fastened to a cord of sinews, with which from time to time
+he speared a large fish and drew it to the bank.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 79.
+
+Mammoth engraved on ivory by Palaeolithic man.]
+
+But the most curious sight of all, among such a rude people, was a man
+sitting by the glowing fire at the mouth of one of the caves scratching
+a piece of reindeer horn with a pointed flint, while the children
+gathered round him to watch his work. What was he doing? See! gradually
+the rude scratches began to take shape, and two reindeer fighting
+together could be recognised upon the horn handle. This he laid
+carefully aside, and taking a piece of ivory, part of the tusk of a
+mammoth, he worked away slowly and carefully till the children grew
+tired of watching and went off to play behind the fire. Then the
+magician, glancing over his shoulder, saw a true figure of the mammoth
+scratched upon the ivory, his hairy skin, long mane, and up-curved tusks
+distinguishing him from all elephants living now. "_Ah_," exclaimed the
+magician aloud, "_that is the drawing on ivory found in the cave of La
+Madeleine in Dordogne, proving that man existed ages ago, and even knew
+how to draw figures, at a time when the mammoth, or hairy elephant, long
+since extinct, was still living on the earth!_"
+
+With these words he started from his reverie, and knew that he had been
+dreaming of Palaeolithic man who, with his tools of rough flints, had
+lived in Europe so long ago that his date cannot be fixed by years, or
+centuries, or even thousands of years. Only this is known, that, since
+he lived, the mammoth, the sabre-toothed tiger, the cave-bear, the
+woolly rhinoceros, the cave-hyaena, the musk-sheep, and many other
+animals have died out from off the face of the earth; the hippopotamus
+and the lion have left Europe and retired to Africa, and the sea has
+flowed in where land once was, cutting off Great Britain and Ireland
+from the continent.
+
+How long all these changes were in taking place no one knows. When the
+magician drifted back again into his dream the land had long been
+desolate, and the hyaenas, which had always taken possession of the caves
+whenever the men deserted them for awhile, had now been undisturbed for
+a long time, and had left on the floor of the cave gnawed skulls and
+bones, and jaws of animals, more or less scored with the marks of their
+teeth, and these had become buried in a thick layer of earth. The
+magician knew that these teeth marks had been made by hyaenas, both
+because living hyaenas leave exactly such marks on bones in the present
+day, and because the hyaena bones alone were not gnawed, showing that no
+animals preyed upon their flesh. He knew too that the hyaenas had been
+there long after man had ceased to use the caves, because no flint
+tools were found among the bones. But now the age of hyaenas, too, was
+past and gone, and the caves had been left so long undisturbed that in
+many of them the water dripping from the roof had left film after film
+of carbonate of lime upon the floor, which as the centuries went by
+became a layer of stalagmite many feet thick, sealing down the secrets
+of the past.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+The face of the country was now entirely changed. The glaciers were
+gone, and so, too, were all the strange animals. True, the reindeer, the
+wild ox, and even here and there the Irish elk, were still feeding in
+the valleys; wolves and bears still made the country dangerous, and
+beavers built their dams across the streams, which were now much smaller
+than formerly, and flowed in deeper channels, carved out by water during
+the interval; but the elephants, rhinoceroses, lions, and tigers were
+gone never to return, and near the caves in which some of the people
+lived, and the rude underground huts which formed the homes of others,
+tame sheep and goats were lying with dogs to watch them. Also, though
+the land was still covered with dense forests, yet here and there small
+clearings had been made, where patches of corn and flax were growing.
+Naked children still played about as before, but now they were moulding
+cups of clay like those in which food was being cooked on the fire
+outside the caves or huts. Some of the women, dressed partly in skins of
+beasts, partly in rough woven linen, were spinning flax into thread,
+using as a spinning-whorl a small round stone with a hole in the middle
+tied to the end of the flax, as a weight to enable them to twirl it.
+Others were grinding corn in the hollow of a large stone by rubbing
+another stone within it.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 80.
+
+Neolithic implements.
+
+1, Stone hatchet mounted in wood. 2, Jade celt, a polished stone weapon,
+from Livermore in Suffolk, 1/4 size. 3, Spindle whorl, 1/2 size.]
+
+The men, while they still spent much time in hunting, had now other
+duties in tending the sheep and goats, or looking after the hogs as they
+turned up the ground in the forest for roots, or sowing and reaping
+their crops. Yet still all the tools were made of stone, no longer rough
+and merely chipped like the old stone weapons, but neatly cut and
+polished. Stone axes with handles of deer-horn, stone spears and
+javelins, stone arrowheads beautifully finished, sling-stones and
+scrapers, were among their weapons and tools, and with them they made
+many delicate implements of bone. On the broad lakes which here and
+there broke the monotony of the forests, canoes, made of the trunks of
+trees hollowed out by fire, were being paddled by one man, while
+another threw out his fishing line armed with delicate bone-hooks; and
+on the banks of the lakes, nets weighted with drilled stones tied on to
+the meshes were dragged up full of fish.
+
+For these Neolithic men, or men of the New Stone Period, who used
+polished stone weapons, were farmers and shepherds and fishermen. They
+knew how to make rude pottery, and kept domestic animals. Moreover, they
+either came from the east or exchanged goods by barter with tribes
+living more to the eastward, now that canoes enabled them to cross the
+sea; for many of their weapons were made of greenstone or jade, and of
+other kinds of stone not to be found in Europe, and their sheep and
+goats were animals of eastern origin. They understood how to unite to
+protect their homes, for they made underground huts by digging down
+several feet into the ground and roofing the hole over with wood coated
+with clay; and often long passages underground united these huts, while
+in many places on the hills, camps, made of ramparts of earth surrounded
+by ditches, served as strongholds for the women and children and the
+flocks and herds, when some neighbouring tribe attacked their
+homesteads.
+
+Still, however, where caves were ready to hand they used them for
+houses, and the same shelter which had been the home of the ancient
+hunters, now resounded with the voices of the shepherds, who, treading
+on the sealed floor, little dreamt that under their feet lay the remains
+of a bygone age.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 81.
+
+A burial in Neolithic times.]
+
+And now, as our dreamer watched this new race of men fashioning their
+weapons, feeding their oxen, and hunting the wild stag, his attention
+was arrested by a long train of people crossing a neighbouring plain,
+weeping and wailing as they went. At the head of this procession, lying
+on a stretcher made of tree-boughs, lay a dead chieftain, and as the
+line moved on, men threw down their tools, and women their spinning, and
+joined the throng. On they went to where two upright slabs of stone with
+another laid across them formed the opening to a long mound or chamber.
+Into this the bearers passed with lighted torches, and in a niche ready
+prepared placed the dead chieftain in a sitting posture with the knees
+drawn up, placing by his side his flint spear and polished axe, his
+necklace of shells, and the bowl from which he had fed. Then followed
+the funeral feast, when, with shouts and wailing, fires were lighted,
+and animals slaughtered and cooked, while the chieftain was not
+forgotten, but portions were left for his use, and then the earth was
+piled up again around the mouth of the chamber, till it should be opened
+at some future time to place another member of his family by his side,
+or till in after ages the antiquary should rifle his resting-place to
+study the mode of burial in the Neolithic or Polished Stone Age.
+
+Time passed on in the magician's dream, and little by little the caves
+were entirely deserted as men learnt to build huts of wood and stone.
+And as they advanced in knowledge they began to melt metals and pour
+them into moulds, making bronze knives and hatchets, swords and spears;
+and they fashioned brooches and bracelets of bronze and gold, though
+they still also used their necklaces of shells and their polished stone
+weapons. They began, too, to keep ducks and fowls, cows and horses; they
+knew how to weave in looms, and to make cloaks and tunics; and when they
+buried their dead it was no longer in a crouching position. They laid
+them decently to rest, as if in sleep, in the barrows where they are
+found to this day with bronze weapons by their side.
+
+Then as time went on they learnt to melt even hard iron, and to beat it
+into swords and plough-shares, and they lived in well-built huts with
+stone foundations. Their custom of burial, too, was again changed, and
+they burnt their dead, placing the ashes in a funeral urn.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 82.
+
+British relics.
+
+1, A coin of the age of Constantine. 2, Bronze weapon from a Suffolk
+barrow. 3, Bronze bracelet from Liss in Hampshire.]
+
+By this time the Britons, as they were now called, had begun to gather
+together in villages and towns, and the Romans ruled over them. Now when
+men passed through the wild country they were often finely dressed in
+cloth tunics, wearing arm rings of gold, some even driving in
+war-chariots, carrying shields made of wickerwork covered with leather.
+Still many of the country people who laboured in the field kept their
+old clothing of beast skins; they grew their corn and stored it in
+cavities of the rocks; they made basket-work boats covered with skin, in
+which they ventured out to sea. So things went on for a long period till
+at last a troubled time came, and the quiet valleys were disturbed by
+wandering people who fled from the towns and took refuge in the
+forests; for the Romans after three hundred and fifty years of rule had
+gone back home to Italy, and a new and barbarous people called the
+Jutes, Angles, and Saxons, came over the sea from Jutland and drove the
+Britons from their homes.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 83.
+
+Britons taking refuge in the Cave.]
+
+And so once more the caves became the abode of man, for the harassed
+Britons brought what few things they could carry away from their houses
+and hid themselves there from their enemies. How little they thought, as
+they lay down to sleep on the cavern floor, that beneath them lay the
+remains of two ages of men! They knew nothing of the woman who had
+dropped her stone spindle-whorl into the fire, on which the food of
+Neolithic man had been cooking in rough pots of clay; they never dug
+down to the layer of gnawed bones, nor did they even in their dreams
+picture the hyaena haunting his ancient den, for a hyaena was an animal
+they had never seen. Still less would they have believed that at one
+time, countless ages before, their island had been part of the
+continent, and that men, living in the cave where they now lay, had cut
+down trees with rough flints, and fought with such unknown animals as
+the mammoth and the sabre-toothed tiger.
+
+But the magician saw it all passing before him, even as he also saw
+these Britons carrying into the cave their brooches, bracelets, and
+finger rings, their iron spears and bronze daggers, and all their little
+household treasures which they had saved in their flight. And among
+these, mingling in the heap, he recognised Roman coins bearing the
+inscription of the Emperor Constantine, and he knew that it was by these
+coins that he had, a few days before in Yorkshire, been able to fix the
+date of the British occupation of a cave.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+And with this his dream ended, and he found himself clutching firmly the
+horn on which Palaeolithic man had engraved the figure of the reindeer.
+He rose, and stretching himself crossed the sunny grass plot of the
+quadrangle and entered his classroom. The boys wondered as he began his
+lecture at the far-away look in his eyes. They did not know how he had
+passed through a vision of countless ages; but that afternoon, for the
+first time, they realised, as he unfolded scene after scene, the history
+of "The Men of Ancient Days."
+
+
+
+
+INDEX
+
+
+ Abbot's Way across Dartmoor, 196
+
+ Absorption of rays of sunlight, 129
+
+ Abyssinia, wild ass of, 203
+
+ _Actinozoa_, Cydippe allied to the, 190
+
+ Ages, lapse of between old and new stone age, 217
+
+ Alcor, or Jack, 158
+
+ Aldebaran, 149;
+ called so by the Arabs, 153;
+ colour of, 167
+
+ Algol the Variable, 162, 165
+
+ Almach, [Greek: g] Andromedae, 156;
+ a coloured double star, 167
+
+ America, extinction of original horse in, 207
+
+ Andromeda, the great nebula of, 162, 164;
+ double coloured star in, 167
+
+ Animal of the Sea-mat, 191;
+ number in one leaf, 193
+
+ Animal-trees and stony plants, 178
+
+ Animals, extinct, living with man, 211
+
+ Antares, a ruby-red star, 167
+
+ Antherozoids of mosses, 89
+
+ Apothecia of lichens, 83
+
+ Apennines, Lunar, figured, 19
+
+ Archimedes, a lunar crater, 10;
+ smooth centre of, 19
+
+ Arctic lands, lichens in, 82
+
+ Arcturus, colour of, 166
+
+ Aristarchus, a lunar crater, 10, 24;
+ streaks around, 17
+
+ Aristotle, a lunar crater, 10
+
+ Arrows, old stone, 215
+
+ Asia, horse of Central, 201
+
+ _Asinus taeniopus_, 203
+
+ _Aspergillus glaucus_, 61;
+ growth of, 63
+
+ Ass tribe, forms allied to the, 201
+
+ Ass, wild of Africa, 203
+
+ Atmosphere, absence of in the moon, 21
+
+ Australia, wild horses of, 207
+
+
+ _Bacillaria Paradoxa_, a diatom, 185
+
+ Bacteria growing on wounds, 66
+
+ Baiae, hill thrown up on Bay of, 103
+
+ Ball, Sir R., on binary stars, 154
+
+ Beehive, triple star near the, 168
+
+ Beer, fermentation of, 65
+
+ Bellatrix, a star in Orion, 148
+
+ Berlin, ground beneath, formed of diatoms, 186
+
+ Bessel, on movements of Sirius, 169
+
+ Betelgeux, a star in Orion, 148
+
+ Binary star in Great Bear, 157, 158
+
+ Binary stars, 154, 166, 170
+
+ Bog-moss or Sphagnum, 93
+
+ Bog-mosses, distribution of, 94
+
+ Bombs, volcanic, 105
+
+ Booetis [Greek: e], a coloured double star, 167
+
+ Britons inhabiting caves, 224;
+ ornaments and customs of, 223
+
+ Britons of Dartmoor, 196
+
+ Bronze weapon and bracelet, 223
+
+ Bryum or thread moss, 77
+
+ Buckfast Abbey, monks of, 196
+
+ Bunt, a fungus, 64
+
+ Burial in Neolithic times, 221
+
+ Cassiopeia, the constellation, 162;
+ coloured double star in, 167
+
+ Castor, a binary star, 154
+
+ Camera, photographic, 47;
+ attached to the telescope, 121
+
+ Cancer [Greek: z], a triple coloured star, 168
+
+ Candle-flame, image of, formed by lens, 33
+
+ Canis Major, constellation of, 148
+
+ Capella, colour of the star, 153
+
+ Castor, light of compared with a near star, 158
+
+ Caterpillars destroyed by fungus, 66
+
+ Caucasus Mountains on the Moon, 18
+
+ Cave, the three periods of a, 225
+
+ Caves, Palaeolithic and Neolithic, 210;
+ Palaeolithic life in, 211;
+ hyaenas roamed in, 217;
+ Neolithic life in, 218;
+ Britons took refuge in, 224
+
+ Cells, fertile of mushroom, 69;
+ of moss-plant, 89
+
+ Celt, jade, from Suffolk, 219
+
+ Chambers, Mr., his drawing of [Greek: e] Lyrae, 166
+
+ Charles's Wain, 155;
+ part of Great Bear, 157;
+ stars of drifting, 159;
+ stars visible in waggon of, 160;
+ double coloured star in, 158, 167
+
+ _Chilomonas amygdalum_, a monad, 182
+
+ Ciliary muscle, action of the, 34
+
+ Clark, Alvan, on companion of Sirius, 169
+
+ Clockwork of telescope, 2
+
+ _Cocconema lanceolatum_, a diatom, 184
+
+ Coin of age of Constantine, 223
+
+ _Confervae_, growth of, 79
+
+ Commons, Mr., photographed Orion's nebula, 152
+
+ Constantine, coin of age of, 223
+
+ Constellations, maps of, 148, 156
+
+ Copernicus, a lunar crater, 10, 24;
+ figured, 17;
+ bright streaks around, 18
+
+ Copper-sulphate in lava, 108
+
+ _Corallina_, a stony seaweed, 175;
+ fruit of, 177;
+ appearance like _Sertularia_, 179
+
+ Cornea of the eye, 31
+
+ Corona, nature of the sun's, 123, 137
+
+ Cottam, Mr. A., his plate of coloured stars, 167
+
+ Crater, lava flowing from a, 98;
+ interior of Vesuvius, 100
+
+ Crater-plains, 19-21
+
+ Craters on the moon, 10, 13, 17, 19, 20;
+ of earth and moon compared, 16
+
+ Crystallites in volcanic glass, 109
+
+ Crystallisation, two periods of, in lava, 115
+
+ Crystals forming in artificial lavas, 114;
+ precious, 116
+
+ _Cydippe pileus_, a living jelly-ball, 187;
+ structure of, 188-190
+
+ Cygni [Greek: b], a coloured double star, 167
+
+
+ Dartmoor, fairy rings on, 57, 58;
+ the Sundew on, 56;
+ granite figured, 112;
+ ponies, 195
+
+ De la Rue, his photograph of moon, 13
+
+ Devonshire ponies, black stripe on, 201
+
+ Diatom, a growing, 185
+
+ _Diatoma hyalina_, 184
+
+ Diatoms, magnified fossil, 39;
+ living marine, 184
+
+ Didymium, giving a broken spectrum, 126
+
+ Dordogne, caves of the, 210, 215
+
+ Draper, Prof., photographed Orion's nebula, 152
+
+ _Drosera rotundifolia_ on Dartmoor, 56
+
+ Dschiggetai, horse-ass of Tibet, 200
+
+ Dsungarian desert, wild horse of the, 203
+
+ Dykes, nature of volcanic, 111
+
+
+ Earth, path of the moon round the, 8;
+ magnetic storm on, caused by sun, 14;
+ reservoirs of melted matter in the, 101
+
+ Earthquakes accompanying volcanic outbursts, 102
+
+ Eclipse of sun, red jets and corona seen during, 125
+
+ Eclipse, total, of the moon, 23;
+ lurid light during, 25
+
+ Eclipses, how caused, 7
+
+ Elephant, hairy, engraved on ivory, 216
+
+ _Empusa muscae_, 66
+
+ Engis and Engihoul caves, 210
+
+ England, ancient caves in, 210;
+ in Palaeolithic times, 211
+
+ Eocene, toed horses of the, 205
+
+ _Eohippus_, or horse of the dawn, 205
+
+ _Equus hemionus_, the horse-ass, 202
+
+ Eratosthenes, a lunar crater, 10
+
+ Erbia, giving a broken spectrum, 126
+
+ Ergot, a fungus, 61
+
+ Eruptions of Vesuvius, 97, 100, 104
+
+ Eudoxus, a lunar crater, 10
+
+ Experiments, necessity for accurate, 54
+
+ Eye, structure of the, 29-32;
+ mode of seeing with the, 32;
+ short-sighted, 29, 35;
+ distances spanned by the naked, 40
+
+
+ Faculae on the sun's face, 122, 140
+
+ Fairy rings, 55;
+ mentioned in _Merry Wives of Windsor_, 57;
+ growth of, 71-73
+
+ Ferments caused by fungi, 60, 64
+
+ Fishing in ancient times, 215, 220
+
+ _Fistulina hepatica_, a fungus, 71
+
+ Flint skeletons of plants, 185
+
+ Flustra or sea-mat, 187;
+ structure of, 191-193
+
+ Fly, fungus killing a, 66
+
+ Focal images, 33;
+ distances, 44
+
+ Fouque, M., artificial lava made by, 112
+
+ Fructification of mushrooms, 69;
+ of lichens, 83;
+ of mosses, 91;
+ of seaweeds, 177
+
+ _Funaria hygrometrica_, urn of the, 89, 91;
+ has no urn lid, 92
+
+ Fungi, nature of, 59;
+ different kinds of, 60;
+ attacking insects, 66;
+ growing on wounds, 66;
+ the use of, 74
+
+ Fungus and green cells in lichen, 81
+
+
+ Gardener, advice of the old, 118
+
+ Gas, spectrum of a, 126
+
+ Gases revealed by spectroscope, 52
+
+ Gemini, the constellation, 154
+
+ Geminorum, [Greek: d], a double coloured star, 167
+
+ Gills of mushroom, 69
+
+ _Gomphonema marinum_, 184
+
+ Gooseberry, fermentation in a, 64
+
+ Gory dew, _Palmella cruenta_, 79
+
+ Graham's island thrown up, 102
+
+ Granular appearance of sun's face, 123
+
+ Grape fungus, 65
+
+ Great Bear, the constellation, 157;
+ binary star in, 158;
+ coloured double star in, 158, 168
+
+ Greenstone, Neolithic weapons of, 220
+
+ Guards, the, in the Little Bear, 162
+
+
+ Hartz Mountains, caves of the, 210
+
+ Hatchet, a Neolithic stone, 219
+
+ Hebrides, volcanic islands of, 111
+
+ Henri, MM., photograph of moon's face by, 19
+
+ Herculaneum, buried, 98, 104
+
+ Herculis [Greek: a], a coloured double star, 168
+
+ Hermitage, lava stream flowing behind the, 97, 99
+
+ Herschel's drawing of Copernicus, 17
+
+ Huggins, Dr., on shape of prominences, 135;
+ on spectra of nebulae, 151;
+ on cause of colour in stars, 168
+
+ Himalayas, single-celled plants in the, 79
+
+ Horse, wild, of the Pampas, 198;
+ of Tartary, 199;
+ of Kirghiz steppes, 200;
+ Przevalsky's, 202;
+ early history of toed, 204;
+ structure of foot and hoof of, 205;
+ skeleton of, 206;
+ origin and migration of early, 207
+
+ Hungary, ancient caves of, 210
+
+ Huyghens, the highest peak in Lunar Apennines, 19
+
+
+ Image formed at focus of lens, 33;
+ of sky in telescope, 49
+
+ Implements, old stone, 213;
+ new stone, 219
+
+ Imps of plant-life, 59
+
+ India, low plants in springs of, 79;
+ solar eclipse seen in, 124;
+ wild ass of, 203
+
+ Infusorial earth, 186
+
+ Infusorians in a seaside pool, 183
+
+ Inhabitants of a seaside pool, 172-174
+
+ Iris of the eye, 30
+
+ Iron pyrites in lava, 108
+
+ Iron slag, lava compared to, 105
+
+ Islands, volcanic thrown up, 102
+
+
+ Jack by the second horse, 157
+
+ Jade, Neolithic weapons of, 220
+
+ Jannsen, Prof., on sun prominences, 131
+
+ Judd, Mr., on volcano of Mull, 111
+
+ Jutes and Angles invading Britain, 224
+
+
+ Kant on nebular hypothesis, 152
+
+ Kent's Cavern, rough stone implement from, 213
+
+ Kepler, a lunar crater, 10;
+ streaks around, 17
+
+ Kertag, or wild horse, 202
+
+ Kew, sun-storm registered at, 143
+
+ Kiang or Kulan, 200
+
+ Kirchhoff, Prof., on sunlight, 128
+
+ Kulan or Kiang, 200
+
+
+ Labrador felspar artificially made, 113
+
+ Langley, Prof., sun-spot drawn by, 141
+
+ Laplace, nebular hypothesis of, 152
+
+ Lava, aspect of flowing, 99;
+ reservoirs of molten, 101;
+ nature of, 107;
+ artificially made, 113;
+ two periods of crystallisation in, 115
+
+ Lava-stream, history of a, 100;
+ section of a, 108;
+ rapid cooling of surface, 108
+
+ Laver or sea-lettuce, structure of, 176
+
+ Leo, the constellation, 155
+
+ Leucotephrite artificially made, 113
+
+ Lens, natural, of the eye, 31;
+ simple magnifying, 35
+
+ Levy, M., artificial lava made by, 112
+
+ Lichens, specimens of from life, 77;
+ the life-history of, 80-84;
+ sections of, 81;
+ distribution of 82, 95;
+ fructification of, 83;
+ causes of success of, 94
+
+ Lick telescope, magnifying power of, 46
+
+ Light, lurid, on moon during eclipse, 24;
+ sifted by spectroscope, 126
+
+ Light-granules on sun's face, 123;
+ supposed explanation of, 141
+
+ Lime-tree, fungi on the, 64
+
+ Liss, bronze bracelet from, 223
+
+ Little Bear, pole-star and guards in the, 162
+
+ Lockyer, Mr., on sun-prominences, 131, 136
+
+ Lunar Apennines figured, 19
+
+ Lyrae [Greek: epsilon], a double-binary star, 166
+
+
+ Machairodus, tooth of, 213
+
+ Madeleine, La, carvings from cave of, 216
+
+ Magic glasses and how to use them, 27;
+ what can be done by, 28, 53
+
+ Magician's chamber, 1;
+ his pupils, 4;
+ spells, 28;
+ his dream of ancient days, 209
+
+ Magnetic connection of sun and earth, 142
+
+ Magnifying-glass, action of a, 35
+
+ Mammoth engraved on ivory, 216
+
+ Maps of constellations, 148, 156
+
+ _Marasmius oreastes_, fairy-ring mushroom, 55, 72
+
+ _Mazeppa_, quotation from Byron's, 201
+
+ Men of older stone age, 212;
+ of Neolithic age, 218
+
+ _Mesohippus_, a toed horse, 205
+
+ Microliths in volcanic glass, 109, 110, 113, 115;
+ formed in artificial lava, 113
+
+ Microscope, 3;
+ action of the, 36-38
+
+ Mildews are fungi, 60
+
+ Milky Way, 149;
+ Cassiopeia in the, 163
+
+ Minerals crystallising in lava, 108
+
+ Mines, increase of temperature in, 101
+
+ Miohippus, or lesser toed horse, 206
+
+ Mizar, a double-coloured star in the Great Bear, 158, 168
+
+ Monads, size and activity of, 183
+
+ Monks, ancient, of Dartmoor, 196
+
+ Monte Nuovo thrown up in 1538, 103
+
+ Moon, phases of the, 6;
+ course in the heavens, 8;
+ map of the, 10;
+ craters of the, 10, 13, 17, 19, 20;
+ face of full, 11;
+ a worn-out planet, 21;
+ no atmosphere in the, 21;
+ diagram of eclipse of, 23;
+ lurid light on during eclipse, 24
+
+ Moss-leaf magnified, 87
+
+ Moss, life-history of a, 84, 92;
+ a stem of feathery, 85;
+ protonema of a, 86;
+ modes of new growth of a, 88;
+ fructification of a, 89;
+ urns of a, 89, 91
+
+ Mosses, different kinds of, 77;
+ advantages and distribution of, 94
+
+ Moulds are fungi, 60;
+ how they grow, 63
+
+ Mountains of the moon, 19;
+ formation of, 21
+
+ _Mucor Mucedo_, figured, 61;
+ growth of, 63
+
+ Mull, volcanic dykes in the island of, 111
+
+ Mushroom, early stages and spawn of, 67;
+ mycelium of, 67;
+ later stages of, 68;
+ section of gills of, 69;
+ spores of, 70;
+ fairy or Scotch bonnet, 72
+
+ Mycelium of mould, 63;
+ of mushroom, 67;
+ of fairy rings, 72
+
+
+ Naples, volcanic eruption seen at, 96;
+ Monte Nuovo thrown up near, 103
+
+ Nasmyth on bright lunar streaks, 16
+
+ Nebula of Orion, 149;
+ spectrum of, 151;
+ photographs of, 152;
+ of Pleiades, 153;
+ of Andromeda, 163-164
+
+ Needle, bone, from a cave, 212
+
+ Neolithic implements, 219;
+ industries and habits, 218-220;
+ burials, 221
+
+ Neptune, invisible to naked eye, 35
+
+ Neison, Mr., his drawing of Plato, 20
+
+ _Nostoc_, growing on stones, 79
+
+
+ Oak, fungi on the, 64
+
+ Observatory, the Magician's, 2;
+ astronomical on Vesuvius, 97;
+ cascade of lava behind the, 99
+
+ Obsidian, or volcanic glass, 109
+
+ Occultation of a star, 22, 25
+
+ Onager, or wild ass of Asia, 203
+
+ Optic nerve of eye, 34
+
+ Orion, constellation of, 147, 149;
+ great nebula of, 149;
+ photographs of Nebula of, 152;
+ coloured double stars in, 168
+
+ Orionis [Greek: th], or Trapezium, 150
+
+ Ornaments of ancient Britons, 222
+
+ Orohippus, a toed horse, 205
+
+ _Oscillariae_, growth of, 79
+
+
+ Palaeolithic man, 212;
+ relics, 213;
+ life, 214, 216
+
+ Pampas, wild horses of the, 198
+
+ _Penicillium glaucum_, figured, 61;
+ growth of, 63
+
+ Penumbra of an eclipse, 23;
+ of sun-spots, 140
+
+ Perithecia of lichens, 84
+
+ Petavius, a lunar crater, 10
+
+ Photographic camera, 3, 47;
+ attached to telescope, 121
+
+ Photographs of the moon, 13, 19;
+ of galloping horse, 48;
+ of the stars, 49, 161;
+ of the sun, 121
+
+ Photosphere of the sun, 123
+
+ Philadelphia, electric shocks at during sun-storm, 143
+
+ Pixies of plant life, 59
+
+ Plains of the moon, 10;
+ nature of the, 12
+
+ Plants, colourless, single-celled, 65;
+ single-celled green, 78;
+ two kinds of in lichens, 80;
+ with flint skeletons, 185
+
+ Plato, a lunar crater, 10, 24;
+ figured, 20
+
+ Pleiades, the, 153;
+ nebulae in, 153
+
+ _Pleurococcus_, a single-celled plant, 78
+
+ Plough, the, or Charles's Wain, 157
+
+ Pointers, in Charles's Wain, 161
+
+ Pole-star, the, 161;
+ a yellow sun, 166
+
+ Pollux, a yellow sun, 166
+
+ _Polysiphonia_, a red seaweed, 175;
+ fruit of, 177
+
+ _Polytrichum commune_, a hair moss, 88;
+ its urns protected by a lid, 91
+
+ Pool, inhabitants of a seaside, 172-74
+
+ Precious stones, formation of, 116
+
+ Proctor, his star atlas, 146;
+ on drifting of Charles's Wain, 159
+
+ Prominence-spectrum and sun-spectrum compared, 134
+
+ Prominences, red, of the sun, 125;
+ seen in full daylight, 131-133;
+ shape of, 135
+
+ _Protococcus nivalis_, 79
+
+ Protonema of a moss, 86
+
+ Przevalsky's wild horse, 202
+
+ Ptolemy, a lunar crater, 10
+
+ Puffballs, 67, 70;
+ use of in nature, 73
+
+ Pupil of the eye, 30
+
+ Puzzuoli, eruption near, 1538, 103
+
+
+ Quaggas, herds of, 203
+
+
+ Rain-band in the solar spectrum, 130
+
+ Rain-shower during volcanic eruption, 107
+
+ Readings in the sky, 53, 127, 151, 168
+
+ Red snow, a single-celled plant, 79
+
+ Regulus, the star, 155, 166
+
+ Reindeer, carving on horn of, 216
+
+ Reservoirs of molten rock underground, 101
+
+ Resina, ascent of Vesuvius from, 98
+
+ Retina of the eye, 31;
+ image of object on the, 33
+
+ Richmond, Virginia, infusorial earth of, 186
+
+ Rigel, a star in Orion, 149;
+ a coloured double star, 168
+
+ Rings, growth of fairy, 73
+
+ Roberts, Mr. I., his photograph of Orion's nebula, 152;
+ and of nebula of the Pleiades, 153;
+ and of nebula of Andromeda, 164
+
+ Rosse, Lord, his telescope, 46;
+ on Orion's nebula, 150;
+ stars visible in his telescope, 160
+
+ Rue, De la, his photograph of the moon, 13
+
+ Rust on plants, 61
+
+
+ Sabrina island formed, 102
+
+ Saturn, distance of, 40
+
+ Saxons, invasion of the, 224
+
+ Schwabe, Herr, on sun-spots cycle, 137
+
+ Scoriae of volcanoes, 108
+
+ "Scotch bonnet" mushroom, 72
+
+ Sea-mat, _see_ Flustra
+
+ "Seas" lunar, so-called, 10
+
+ Seaweeds, a group of, 175;
+ fruits of, 177
+
+ Secchi, Father, on depth of a sun-spot, 139
+
+ Selwyn, Mr., photograph of sun by, 122
+
+ Senses alone tell us of outer world, 29
+
+ _Sertularia tenella_, structure of, 180;
+ _cupressina_, 181
+
+ Sertularian and coralline, resemblance of, 179
+
+ Shakespeare on fairy rings, 57
+
+ Shipley, Mr., saw volcanic island formed, 103
+
+ Sight, far and near, 35
+
+ Silkworm destroyed by fungi, 66
+
+ Sirius, 146;
+ a bluish white sun, 166;
+ irregularities of caused by a companion, 169
+
+ Skeleton of the horse, 206
+
+ Skin diseases caused by fungi, 61, 66
+
+ Sky, light readings in the, 53, 127, 151, 168
+
+ Smut, a fungus, 61
+
+ Sodium lime in the spectrum, 128
+
+ Somma, part of ancient Vesuvius, 97, 104
+
+ Spawn of mushroom, 67
+
+ Spectra, plate of coloured, 127
+
+ Spectroscope, 3;
+ Kirchhoff's, 51;
+ gases revealed by the, 52;
+ direct vision, 127;
+ sifting light, 126;
+ attached to telescope, 132
+
+ Spectrum of sunlight, 127, 130
+
+ Sphacelaria, a brown-green seaweed, 175;
+ fruit of, 177
+
+ Sphagnum or bog moss, 77, 93;
+ structure of leaves of, 93
+
+ Spindle-whorl from Neolithic caves, 219
+
+ Spore-cases of mosses, 89, 91, 93
+
+ Spores of moulds, 63;
+ of mushroom, 70;
+ of lichens, 83;
+ of mosses, 91
+
+ Star, occultation of, by the moon, 24;
+ a double-binary, 166;
+ a dark, travelling round Sirius, 169
+
+ Star-cluster in Perseus, 162
+
+ Star-depths, 160, 171
+
+ Stars, light from the, 40, 42;
+ visible in the country, 145;
+ apparent motion of the, 146;
+ maps of, 148, 156;
+ of milky way, 149;
+ binary, 154;
+ real motion of, 159;
+ drifting, 159;
+ number of known and estimated, 161;
+ colours of, 166;
+ double coloured, 167;
+ cause of colour in, 168;
+ are they centres of solar systems? 170
+
+ Statur or wild horse, 202
+
+ Streaks, bright, on the moon, 14-17
+
+ Suffolk, bronze weapon from barrow in, 223
+
+ Sun, path of the moon round the, 8;
+ one of the stars, 119;
+ how to look at the, 119;
+ face of, thrown on a screen, 120;
+ photograph of the, 122;
+ prominences, corona, and faculae of, 122-125;
+ mottling of face of, 123;
+ total eclipse of, 124;
+ zodiacal line round, 125;
+ dark lines in spectrum of, 128;
+ reversing layer of, 131;
+ metals in the, 131;
+ sudden outburst in the, 142;
+ magnetic connection with the earth, 143;
+ a yellow star, 166
+
+ Sun's rays touching moon during eclipse, 24
+
+ Sun-spots, cycle of, 137;
+ proving sun's rotation, 138;
+ nature of, 139;
+ quiet and unquiet, 140;
+ formation of, 142
+
+ Sundew on Dartmoor, 56
+
+
+ Tarpan, a wild horse, 199
+
+ Tartary, wild horses of, 199
+
+ Tavistock Abbey, monks of, 196
+
+ Telescope, clock-work, adjusting a, 2;
+ an astronomical, 41;
+ magnifying power of the, 43-46;
+ giant, 46;
+ terrestrial, 47;
+ what can be seen in a small, 46;
+ how the sun is photographed in the, 122;
+ how the spectroscope is worked with the, 132
+
+ Teneriffe, peak of compared to lunar craters, 15
+
+ Tennant, Major, drawing of eclipsed sun by, 123
+
+ Temperature, underground, 101
+
+ _Thuricolla follicula_, a transparent infusorian, 182
+
+ Tiger, sabre-toothed, 211, 213
+
+ _Tilletia caria_ or bunt, 64
+
+ Toadstools, 67, 70;
+ use of in nature, 73
+
+ Tools, of ancient stone period, 214, 215
+
+ Tooth of machairodus, 213
+
+ Torquay, the Magician's pool near, 172
+
+ Tors of Dartmoor, 197
+
+ Trapezium of Orion, 150
+
+ _Tremella mesenterica_ fungus, 71
+
+ Tripoli formed of diatoms, 35
+
+ Tundras, lichens and mosses of the, 82, 95
+
+ Tycho, a lunar crater, 10;
+ description of, 13;
+ bright streaks of, 14
+
+
+ _Ulva_, a green seaweed, 175;
+ a section magnified, 176
+
+ Umbra of an eclipse, 23
+
+ Urns of mosses, 89, 91
+
+ _Ustilago carbo_, or smut, 64
+
+ Variable stars, 165
+
+ Vega, a bluish-white sun, 166;
+ double-binary star near, 165
+
+ Veil of mushroom, 68
+
+ Vesuvian lavas imitated, 113
+
+ Vesuvius, eruption of 1868 described, 97, 99, 104;
+ dormant, 103;
+ eruption of in A.D. 79, 104
+
+ Volcanic craters of earth and moon compared, 16;
+ eruptions in the moon, 21;
+ glass under the microscope, 109, 110, 115
+
+ Volcano, diagram of an active, 105
+
+ Volcanoes, the cause of discussed, 101, 102;
+ ancient, laid bare, 111
+
+
+ Washington, electric shocks at during sun-storm, 143
+
+ Winter in Palaeolithic times, 215
+
+ Wood, winter growth in a, 76
+
+ "World without End," 115
+
+
+ Yeast, growth of, 65
+
+ Yorkshire, Roman coins in caves of, 225
+
+
+ Zebra, herds of, 203
+
+ Zodiacal light, 125
+
+
+THE END
+
+
+ * * * * *
+
+
+
+
+D. APPLETON & CO.'S PUBLICATIONS.
+
+
+ _THE FAIRYLAND OF SCIENCE._ By ARABELLA B. BUCKLEY. With 74
+ Illustrations. Cloth, gilt, $1.50.
+
+"Deserves to take a permanent place in the literature of
+youth."--_London Times._
+
+"So interesting that, having once opened the book, we do not know how to
+leave off reading."--_Saturday Review._
+
+
+ _LIFE AND HER CHILDREN: Glimpses of Animal Life from the Amoeba
+ to the Insects._ By ARABELLA B. BUCKLEY. With over 100
+ Illustrations. Cloth, gilt, $1.50.
+
+"The work forms a charming introduction to the study of zoology--the
+science of living things--which, we trust, will find its way into many
+hands."--_Nature._
+
+
+ _WINNERS IN LIFE'S RACE; or, the Great Backboned Family._ By
+ ARABELLA B. BUCKLEY. With numerous Illustrations. Cloth, gilt,
+ $1.50.
+
+"We can conceive no better gift-book than this volume. Miss Buckley has
+spared no pains to incorporate in her book the latest results of
+scientific research. The illustrations in the book deserve the highest
+praise--they are numerous, accurate, and striking."--_Spectator._
+
+
+ _A SHORT HISTORY OF NATURAL SCIENCE; and of the Progress of
+ Discovery from the Time of the Greeks to the Present Time._ By
+ ARABELLA B. BUCKLEY. New edition, revised and rearranged. With
+ 77 Illustrations. Cloth, $2.00.
+
+"The work, though mainly intended for children and young persons, may be
+most advantageously read by many persons of riper age, and may serve to
+implant in their minds a fuller and clearer conception of 'the promises,
+the achievements, and claims of science.'"--_Journal of Science._
+
+
+ _A WORLD OF WONDERS; or, Marvels in Animate and Inanimate
+ Nature._ A Book for Young Readers. With 322 Illustrations on
+ Wood. Large 12mo. Cloth, illuminated, $2.00.
+
+_CONTENTS._--Wonders of Marine Life; Curiosities of Vegetable Life;
+Curiosities of the Insect and Reptile World; Marvels of Bird and Beast
+Life; Phenomenal Forces of Nature.
+
+
+ _AROUND AND ABOUT SOUTH AMERICA: Twenty Months of Quest and
+ Query._ By FRANK VINCENT, author of "The Land of the White
+ Elephant," etc. With Maps, Plans, and 54 full-page
+ Illustrations. 8vo, xxiv-473 pages. Ornamental cloth, $5.00.
+
+No former traveler has made so comprehensive and thorough a tour of
+Spanish and Portuguese America as did Mr. Vincent. He visited every
+capital, chief city, and important seaport, made several expeditions
+into the interior of Brazil and the Argentine Republic, and ascended the
+Parana, Paraguay, Amazon, Orinoco, and Magdalena Rivers; he visited the
+crater of Pichinchas, 16,000 feet above the sea-level; he explored falls
+in the center of the continent, which, though meriting the title of
+"Niagara of South America," are all but unknown to the outside world; he
+spent months in the picturesque capital of Rio Janeiro; he visited the
+coffee districts, studied the slaves, descended the gold-mines, viewed
+the greatest rapids of the globe, entered the isolated Guianas, and so
+on.
+
+
+ _BRAZIL: Its Condition and Prospects._ By C. C. ANDREWS,
+ ex-Consul-General to Brazil. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50.
+
+"I hope I may be able to present some facts in respect to the present
+situation of Brazil which will be both instructive and entertaining to
+general readers. My means of acquaintance with that empire are
+principally derived from a residence of three years at Rio de Janeiro,
+its capital, while employed in the service of the United States
+Government, during which period I made a few journeys into the
+interior."--_From the Preface._
+
+
+ _FIVE THOUSAND MILES IN A SLEDGE: A Mid-Winter Journey across
+ Siberia._ By LIONEL F. GOWING. With Map and 30 Illustrations in
+ Text. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50.
+
+"The book is most certainly one to be read, and will be welcomed as an
+addition to the scant literature on a singularly interesting
+country."--_Courier._
+
+
+ _CHINA: Travels and Investigations in the "Middle Kingdom."_ A
+ Study of its Civilization and Possibilities. With a Glance at
+ Japan. By JAMES HARRISON WILSON, late Major-General United
+ States Volunteers and Brevet Major-General United States Army.
+ 12mo. Cloth, $1.75.
+
+"The book presents China and Japan in all these aspects; the manners and
+customs of the people; the institutions, tendencies, and social ideas;
+the government and leading men."--_Boston Traveller._
+
+
+ _THE GARDEN'S STORY; or, Pleasures and Trials of an Amateur
+ Gardener._ By GEORGE H. ELLWANGER. With Head and Tail Pieces by
+ Rhead. 12mo. Cloth extra, $1.50.
+
+"Mr. Ellwanger's instinct rarely errs in matters of taste. He writes out
+of the fullness of experimental knowledge, but his knowledge differs
+from that of many a trained cultivator in that his skill in garden
+practice is guided by a refined aesthetic sensibility, and his
+appreciation of what is beautiful in nature is healthy, hearty, and
+catholic. His record of the garden year, as we have said, begins with
+the earliest violet, and it follows the season through until the
+witch-hazel is blossoming on the border of the wintry woods.... This
+little book can not fail to give pleasure to all who take a genuine
+interest in rural life. They will sympathize with most of the author's
+robust and positive judgments, and with his strong aversions as well as
+his tender attachments."--_The Tribune_, New York.
+
+
+ _THE FOLK-LORE OF PLANTS._ By T. F. THISELTON DYER, M.A. 12mo.
+ Cloth, $1.50.
+
+"The Folk-Lore of Plants" traces the superstitions and fancies connected
+with plants in fairy-lore, in witchcraft and demonology, in religion, in
+charms, in medicine, in plant language, etc. The author is an eminent
+English botanist, and superintendent of the gardens at Kew.
+
+"A handsome and deeply interesting volume.... In all respects the book
+is excellent. Its arrangement is simple and intelligible, its style
+bright and alluring; authorities are cited at the foot of the page, and
+a full index is appended.... To all who seek an introduction to one of
+the most attractive branches of folk-lore, this delightful volume may be
+warmly commended."--_Notes and Queries._
+
+
+ _FLOWERS AND THEIR PEDIGREES._ By GRANT ALLEN, author of
+ "Vignettes of Nature," etc. Illustrated. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50.
+
+No writer treats scientific subjects with so much ease and charm of
+style as Mr. Grant Allen. His sketches in the magazines have well been
+called fascinating, and the present volume, being a collection of
+various papers, will fully sustain his reputation as an eminently
+entertaining and suggestive writer.
+
+"'Flowers and their Pedigrees,' by Grant Allen, with many illustrations,
+is not merely a description of British wild flowers, but a discussion of
+why they are, what they are, and how they come to be so; in other words,
+a scientific study of the migration and transformation of plants,
+illustrated by the daisy, the strawberry, the cleavers, wheat, the
+mountain tulip, the cuckoo-pint, and a few others. The study is a
+delightful one, and the book is fascinating to any one who has either
+love for flowers or curiosity about them."--_Hartford Courant._
+
+
+ _THE HISTORY OF ANCIENT CIVILIZATION._ A Hand-book based upon
+ M. Gustave Ducoudray's "Histoire Sommaire de la Civilisation."
+ Edited by the Rev. J. VERSCHOYLE, M.A. With numerous
+ Illustrations. Large 12mo. Cloth, $1.75.
+
+"With M. Ducoudray's work as a basis, many additions having been made,
+derived from special writers, Mr. Verschoyle has produced an excellent
+work, which gives a comprehensive view of early civilization.... As to
+the world of the past, the volume under notice treats of Egypt, Assyria,
+the Far East, of Greece and Rome in the most comprehensive manner. It is
+not the arts alone which are fully illustrated, but the literature,
+laws, manners, and customs, the beliefs of all these countries are
+contrasted. If the book gave alone the history of the monuments of the
+past it would be valuable, but it is its all-around character which
+renders it so useful. A great many volumes have been produced treating
+of a past civilization, but we have seen none which in the same space
+gives such varied information."--_The New York Times._
+
+
+ _GREAT LEADERS: Historic Portraits from the Great Historians._
+ Selected, with Notes and Brief Biographical Sketches, by G. T.
+ FERRIS. With sixteen engraved Portraits. 12mo. Cloth, $1.75.
+
+The Historic Portraits of this work are eighty in number, drawn from the
+writings of PLUTARCH, GROTE, GIBBON, CURTIUS, MOMMSEN, FROUDE, HUME,
+MACAULAY, LECKY, GREEN, THIERS, TAINE, PRESCOTT, MOTLEY, and other
+historians. The subjects extend from Themistocles to Wellington.
+
+"Every one perusing the pages of the historians must have been impressed
+with the graphic and singularly penetrative character of many of the
+sketches of the distinguished persons whose doings form the staple of
+history. These pen-portraits often stand out from the narrative with
+luminous and vivid effect, the writers seeming to have concentrated upon
+them all their powers of penetration and all their skill in graphic
+delineation. Few things in literature are marked by analysis so close,
+discernment so keen, or effects so brilliant and dramatic."--_From the
+Preface._
+
+
+ _LIFE OF THE GREEKS AND ROMANS_, described from Ancient Monuments.
+ By E. GUHL and W. KONER. Translated from the third German
+ edition by F. HUEFFER. With 543 Illustrations. 8vo. Cloth, $2.50.
+
+"The result of careful and unwearied research in every nook and cranny
+of ancient learning. Nowhere else can the student find so many facts in
+illustration of Greek and Roman methods and manners."--_Dr. C. K.
+Adams's Manual of Historical Literature._
+
+
+New York: D. APPLETON & CO., 1, 3, & 5 Bond Street.
+
+
+
+***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THROUGH MAGIC GLASSES AND OTHER
+LECTURES***
+
+
+******* This file should be named 37589.txt or 37589.zip *******
+
+
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/3/7/5/8/37589
+
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://www.gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
+paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works. See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+ the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+ you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
+ owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+ has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+ Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
+ must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+ prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+ returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+ sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+ address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+ the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+ you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+ does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+ License. You must require such a user to return or
+ destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+ and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+ Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+ money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+ electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+ of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+ distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+ Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+ Chief Executive and Director
+ gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit:
+http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+ http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+